MAGNET Field v1.0 - Help Manual Rev. A 1000411-01-2

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 338
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document discusses the user manual for MAGNET Field software, which is used for GPS surveying tasks. It allows users to configure jobs, manage points and measurements, and perform offset measurements using a laser rangefinder.

MAGNET Field is software used for GPS surveying tasks like configuring survey jobs, managing points and measurements, and performing offset measurements.

Jobs in MAGNET Field can be configured by selecting survey parameters like coordinate system, units, and GPS settings. Jobs are managed through functions like creating new jobs, opening existing jobs, and deleting jobs. Points and folders can also be browsed and managed.

P O S I T I O N I N G S Y S T E M S

MAGNET Field 1.0


Help

P/N: 1000411-01
Rev A

©Copyright Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc.


February, 2012

All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Topcon Positioning Systems,


Inc. All rights reserved. The information contained herein may not be used,
accessed, copied, stored, displayed, sold, modified, published, or distributed,
or otherwise reproduced without the expressed written consent from Topcon
Positioning Systems, Inc.
ECO#000069
TOC

Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................... 1-1
Introduction MAGNET Field .......................................... 1-1
Connections ..................................................................... 1-2
Home screen .................................................................... 1-2
Help Options ................................................................... 1-4

Managing Jobs ..................................................... 2-1


Job folder ........................................................................ 2-1
New Job .................................................................... 2-2
Open Job ................................................................... 2-3
Delete Job ................................................................. 2-4
Job Info ..................................................................... 2-5
Browse ....................................................................... 2-6

Configuring Jobs .................................................. 3-1


Configure Folder ............................................................. 3-1
Configuring a New Job .................................................... 3-2
Select Survey Configuration .................................... 3-2
Coordinate System ................................................... 3-4
Units ......................................................................... 3-4
Display ..................................................................... 3-6
Alarms ...................................................................... 3-7
GPS Survey Configurations ............................................. 3-8
Receiver Make .......................................................... 3-8
RTK Survey .............................................................. 3-9
Base Receiver ............................................................ 3-9
Base Peripherals ........................................................ 3-10
Receiver Settings ....................................................... 3-11
Radio ......................................................................... 3-11
Modem Register ........................................................ 3-12
Radio Parameters ...................................................... 3-12

MAGNET Field V1.0 1


Table of Contents

Rover Receiver .......................................................... 3-16


Position for GGA ....................................................... 3-17
RE-S1 FH915 Repeater ............................................. 3-17
Rover Receiver Peripherals ....................................... 3-18
Survey Parameters ..................................................... 3-21
Stakeout Parameters ................................................... 3-22
Advanced Parameters ................................................ 3-25
Miscellaneous (GPS) Parameters .............................. 3-27
RTK Settings ............................................................. 3-27
Network RTK ................................................................... 3-28
Network DGPS .......................................................... 3-31
Real Time DGPS ....................................................... 3-31
Generic NMEA .......................................................... 3-33
PP Static ..................................................................... 3-34
PP Kinematic ............................................................. 3-35
PP DGPS .................................................................... 3-35
Optical Survey Configurations ......................................... 3-36
Instrument .................................................................. 3-36
Connection mode ....................................................... 3-36
Survey Parameters ..................................................... 3-37
Stakeout Parameters ................................................... 3-39
Miscellaneous (Optical) Parameters .......................... 3-39
Search/Track (Topcon) .............................................. 3-41
Search/Track (Sokkia) ............................................... 3-42
Monitor Options ......................................................... 3-42
Coordinate System ........................................................... 3-43
NAD83 Datum Details .............................................. 3-44
Projections ................................................................. 3-45
Grid/Ground Parameters ............................................ 3-46
Custom Projections .................................................... 3-47
Custom Datums ......................................................... 3-48
Custom Ellipsoids ...................................................... 3-49
Geoids ........................................................................ 3-50
Global Settings ................................................................ 3-51
Job Backup Settings ........................................................ 3-52
Configuring Menus ......................................................... 3-53
Codes Settings ................................................................. 3-54
Configuring Stake Reports .............................................. 3-55

2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Table of Contents

Report Configuration ................................................ 3-55


Enterprise Configure ....................................................... 3-56

Exchanging Data .................................................. 4-1


Export To Job .................................................................. 4-2
Select Job .................................................................. 4-2
Export Data To Job ................................................... 4-2
Export Status ............................................................. 4-4
Import from Job ............................................................... 4-5
Import Data from Job ................................................ 4-5
Import Status ............................................................. 4-7
Export To File .................................................................. 4-7
Export Data To File ................................................... 4-8
Import From File .............................................................. 4-12
Import Data From File .............................................. 4-13
Import of Multiple Data Types ................................. 4-14
Export To 3DMC ...................................................... 4-14
Import From 3DMC .................................................. 4-15
Enterprise Upload ...................................................... 4-16
Enterprise Download ....................................................... 4-16
Duplicate Objects ............................................................. 4-16

Chatting ................................................................. 5-1

Editing Job Data ................................................... 6-1


Edit Points ........................................................................ 6-2
Point Info ................................................................... 6-3
Linework Package ..................................................... 6-3
Code - Attributes ....................................................... 6-4
Point Check ............................................................... 6-6
Layer/Style ................................................................ 6-6
WA ............................................................................ 6-7
Photo Note ................................................................. 6-7
PTL ............................................................................ 6-9
Check Points .............................................................. 6-10
Cut Sheet ................................................................... 6-11
Code - Attributes .............................................................. 6-11
Code .......................................................................... 6-11

MAGNET Field V1.0 3


Table of Contents

Attributes ................................................................... 6-12


Linework .......................................................................... 6-13
Edit Area .......................................................................... 6-14
Points in Area ............................................................ 6-14
Point Lists ......................................................................... 6-15
Point List .................................................................... 6-16
Layers ............................................................................... 6-18
Layer .......................................................................... 6-18
Style ........................................................................... 6-19
Objects ....................................................................... 6-19
Edit Raw Data ............................................................ 6-21
List of Stake Reports ........................................................ 6-22
Edit Stake Report ....................................................... 6-22
Background Images .......................................................... 6-23
Properties ................................................................... 6-23
Roads Folder .................................................................... 6-24
Roads ................................................................................ 6-25
Add/Edit Roads .......................................................... 6-25
Start Point .................................................................. 6-26
Vertical Alignment .................................................... 6-27
Add/Edit Road ........................................................... 6-28
Horizontal Alignment ................................................ 6-29
Vertical Alignment .................................................... 6-32
X-Section ................................................................... 6-34
Calculate Road Points ................................................ 6-35
Horizontal Alignments ..................................................... 6-37
Vertical Alignments ......................................................... 6-37
High/Low Positions ................................................... 6-38
X-Section Templates ........................................................ 6-39
X-Sect Template ........................................................ 6-39
X-Section Set .................................................................... 6-40
String Set .......................................................................... 6-41
Add/Edit String Set .................................................... 6-41

Calculate ............................................................... 7-1


Calculate Inverse ....................................................... 7-2
Point in Direction ....................................................... 7-7
Calculate Curves ........................................................ 7-8

4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Table of Contents

Intersection ................................................................ 7-15


Calculator ......................................................................... 7-16
Calculator .................................................................. 7-18
Calculate Area ........................................................... 7-19
Corner Angle ............................................................. 7-23
Calculate Offsets ....................................................... 7-24
Calculate Adjust ........................................................ 7-27
Traverse Calc ............................................................ 7-33
Calculate DTM .......................................................... 7-35

Map ........................................................................ 8-1


Map ................................................................................. 8-1
Map Properties .......................................................... 8-2
Zoom In/Out/Window ............................................... 8-2
Zoom All ................................................................... 8-2
Zoom By Point .......................................................... 8-2

Connections .......................................................... 9-1


Connections .................................................................... 9-1
General Connection Settings ..................................... 9-1
Bluetooth .................................................................. 9-2
Enterprise Connection ............................................... 9-3
Network Connection Settings ................................... 9-4

Setting Up GPS Survey ........................................ 10-1


Setup folder .................................................................. 10-1
Setup GPS folder ....................................................... 10-1
Status ............................................................................... 10-2
Position ...................................................................... 10-2
System ....................................................................... 10-4
Log History ............................................................... 10-5
Multi Base Status ...................................................... 10-6
Scatter Plot ................................................................ 10-7
SVs ............................................................................ 10-7
Mission Planning ..................................................... 10-8
Start Base ....................................................................... 10-10
Multi Base ................................................................. 10-11

MAGNET Field V1.0 5


Table of Contents

Static Occupation .......................................................... 10-12


Localization .................................................................... 10-12
Add Localization Point .............................................. 10-14
Localization Results ................................................... 10-14
Simulator ......................................................................... 10-15
Known Point Initialization ........................................... 10-15
KPI Position ............................................................... 10-16
mmGPS Initialization ...................................................... 10-16
Transmitter Position ................................................... 10-17
Transmitter Position ................................................... 10-17
Sensor ........................................................................ 10-18
Resect mmGps+ Resect ............................................. 10-18
Resect mmGps+ Sensor ............................................. 10-19
Data ............................................................................ 10-20
Transmitter ................................................................. 10-20
Field Calibration ........................................................ 10-21
Known Point .............................................................. 10-21
mmGPS+ Options ...................................................... 10-23
Settings ...................................................................... 10-23
Sessions ........................................................................... 10-24
Sessions ...................................................................... 10-24
Session Setup ............................................................. 10-25
GPS Survey ............................................................................ 11-1
Survey Folder .................................................................. 11-1
Survey GPS ...................................................................... 11-1
Topo ................................................................................. 11-2
Data ............................................................................ 11-3
Map ............................................................................ 11-3
Auto Topo ........................................................................ 11-3
Raw Data ................................................................... 11-4
GPS Offsets ............................................................... 11-5
Cross Section .................................................................... 11-5
Cross Section ............................................................. 11-6
Find Station ...................................................................... 11-6
Tape Dimension ............................................................... 11-7
X-Section .......................................................................... 11-8
PTL Mode .................................................................. 11-9
Laser Setup ....................................................................... 11-10

6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Table of Contents

Optical Survey Setup ........................................... 12-1


Setup Optical (Total Station) Folder ................................ 12-1
BS Survey ................................................................. 12-2
Check Backsight ................................................. 12-3
Remote Control ......................................................... 12-4
Robotic Arrows ................................................... 12-4
Resection ................................................................... 12-5
Resection Options ............................................... 12-5
Optical Survey ...................................................... 13-1
Survey Optical (Total Station) ......................................... 13-1
Topo Survey ..................................................................... 13-2
Sideshot-Direct ................................................... 13-2
Sideshot-Direct/Reverse ..................................... 13-3
Ang/dist Sets-Dir/Rev ......................................... 13-3
Offsets ....................................................................... 13-3
Station and Offset ............................................... 13-4
HA Offset ............................................................ 13-5
Hz/Vt Angle Offset ............................................. 13-5
Distance Offset ................................................... 13-6
Hidden Point ....................................................... 13-7
Two Line Intersection ......................................... 13-7
Line and Corner .................................................. 13-8
Line and Offset ................................................... 13-9
Plane and Corner ................................................. 13-9
Auto Topo ................................................................. 13-10
Elevation (Multiple) .................................................. 13-11
Multiple Backsight .................................................... 13-12
Multi Set Page ........................................................... 13-12
Find Station ............................................................... 13-13
Missing Line ............................................................. 13-14
Tape Dimension ........................................................ 13-14
Reference Line .................................................... 13-14
XSect-Direct/Reverse ............................................... 13-15
Remote Rotate ........................................................... 13-16
Remote Scanning ...................................................... 13-16
Scanning .................................................................... 13-17

MAGNET Field V1.0 7


Table of Contents

View Scan .................................................................. 13-18


Orientation ................................................................. 13-18
Orientation Results .................................................... 13-18
Scan ............................................................................ 13-19
Scan ............................................................................ 13-19
Interval ....................................................................... 13-19
Estimate Time ............................................................ 13-20
Monitor ..................................................................... 13-20
Monitor Options ......................................................... 13-21
Monitor Point List ...................................................... 13-22
Level Survey ......................................................... 14-1
Create Level Run ...................................................... 14-1
Level Run ............................................................ 14-1
Shots .................................................................... 14-2
Stake SS .............................................................. 14-2
Two Peg Test ............................................................ 14-2
Two Peg Test Results ......................................... 14-3
Settings ................................................................ 14-3
Staking .................................................................. 15-1
Stake folder ..................................................................... 15-1
Stake Point ........................................................................ 15-2
Stake DL Point ................................................................. 15-3
Stake Line ......................................................................... 15-4
Stake ................................................................................. 15-5
Data Fields ................................................................. 15-6
Views ......................................................................... 15-6
Stakeout DL ...................................................................... 15-7
Vertical Offset DL ..................................................... 15-7
Stake Offsets .................................................................... 15-8
Stake Line & Offsets ................................................. 15-8
Intersection & Offsets / Line 1 .................................. 15-10
Intersection & Offsets / Line 2 .................................. 15-11
Three Pt Curve ........................................................... 15-11
Stake Curve & Offsets ............................................... 15-12
Stake Spiral & Offset ................................................. 15-13
Stake Surface .................................................................... 15-14
Stake Surface Elevation ................................................... 15-14

8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Table of Contents

Surface Boundary ...................................................... 15-15


Stake Surface Road ................................................... 15-16
Stake DTM ....................................................................... 15-17
Open DTM ................................................................ 15-17
Stake Point in Direction ................................................... 15-18
Stake Point List ................................................................ 15-19
Stake DL Point List ......................................................... 15-19
Stakeout Elevation ........................................................... 15-20
Stake Curve ...................................................................... 15-21
Stake Real-Time Road ..................................................... 15-21
Stake Road (Slope) .......................................................... 15-22
Stake Road ....................................................................... 15-22
Stake Road Alignment ..................................................... 15-23
Stake Slope ...................................................................... 15-24
Stake Linework ................................................................ 15-26
Station & Offsets ....................................................... 15-26
Design Offsets ........................................................... 15-27
Set References / Surface and Point References ......... 15-28
Initial Point Name ..................................................... 15-28
Design Pt/Layer ......................................................... 15-29
Store Point ....................................................................... 15-29
Stake Tab ................................................................... 15-29
Data Tab .................................................................... 15-29
Design Tab ................................................................ 15-30
Offset from CP .......................................................... 15-30
Select Value ..................................................................... 15-31
Applications .......................................................... 16-1
Apps Folder .................................................................... 16-1
How To .................................................................. A-1
Localization in MAGNET Field ...................................... A-1
Basic Concept of Localization .................................. A-2
Localization with Stereographic Projection on 
WGS84 ................................................................... A-3
Localization with Stereographic Projection on any 
Datum ..................................................................... A-4
Localization with any Predefined or Created 
Projection ............................................................... A-4
One-Point localization ............................................... A-5

MAGNET Field V1.0 9


Table of Contents

Two-Point Localization ............................................. A-6


Three-Point Localization ........................................... A-6
Performing Localization ............................................ A-7
Importing the Coordinate Sets to a MAGNET 
Field Job ................................................................. A-9
Setting the Desired Projection ................................... A-11
Adding the Geoid File ............................................... A-11
Creating Localization Points ...................................... A-12
Importing Localization Data to Another Job ............. A-13
Grid to Ground Transformation ....................................... A-14
Creating Ground Projection Relative to a Point ........ A-15
Example of Using "Origin Pt" ................................... A-16
Creating Ground Projection Relative to the 
Origin of Grid System ............................................ A-18
Offsets in MAGNET Field ............................................... A-20
Offsets for TS Survey ................................................ A-20
Offsets for GPS Survey ............................................. A-31

10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Preface

Preface
Thank you for purchasing your Topcon receiver, survey product or
accessory (the “Product”). The materials available in this manual (the
“Manual”) have been prepared by Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc.
(“TPS”) for owners of Topcon products. This Manual is designed to
assist owners with the use of software (the “Software”) to be used
with the Product and its use is subject to these terms and conditions
(the “Terms and Conditions”)

NOTICE NOTICE
Please read these Terms and Conditions carefully.

Terms and Conditions


USE This product is designed to be used by a professional. The user
should have a good knowledge of the safe use of the product and
implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local
government protection agency for both private use and commercial
job sites.
COPYRIGHT All information contained in this Manual is the
intellectual property of, and copyrighted material of TPS. All rights
are reserved. You may not use, access, copy, store, display, create
derivative works of, sell, modify, publish, distribute, or allow any
third party access to, any graphics, content, information or data in this
Manual without TPS’ express written consent and may only use such
information for the care and operation of your Product. The
information and data in this Manual are a valuable asset of TPS and
are developed by the expenditure of considerable work, time and
money, and are the result of original selection, coordination and
arrangement by TPS.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 2-13


TRADEMARKS Topcon®, HiPer®, TopSURV™, Topcon Link™,
Topcon Tools™, and Topcon Positioning Systems™ are trademarks
or registered trademarks of TPS. Windows® and ActiveSync® are
registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth® is a
registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by
Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc. under license. Sokkia Corporation
and the names of Sokkia Corporation products referenced herein are
either trademarks or registered trademarks of Sokkia Corporation.
Satel is a trademark of Satel, Oy. Other product and company names
mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY EXCEPT FOR ANY
WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD
ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT, THIS MANUAL, THE
PRODUCT, AND ANY ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED “AS-IS.” THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES.
TPS DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
USE OR PURPOSE. TPS AND ITS DISTRIBUTORS SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR
OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN; NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE
FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL,
THE SOFTWARE, OR THE PRODUCT. SUCH DISCLAIMED
DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
TIME, LOSS OR DESTRUCTION OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFIT,
SAVINGS OR REVENUE, OR LOSS OF THE PRODUCT’S USE.
IN ADDITION, TPS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OR COSTS INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH
OBTAINING SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE,
CLAIMS BY OTHERS, INCONVENIENCE, OR ANY OTHER
COSTS. IN ANY EVENT, TPS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY
FOR DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER
PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE
FOR THE PORDUCT.
LICENSE AGREEMENT Use of the Software and any other computer
programs or software supplied by TPS or downloaded from a TPS
website (the “Software”) to be used with a Topcon Product constitutes

2-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


acceptance of these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an
agreement to abide by these Terms and Conditions. The user is
granted a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use
such Software under the terms stated herein and in any case only with
a single Product or single computer. You may make one (1) backup
copy of the Software. Otherwise, the Software may not be copied or
reproduced. You may not assign or transfer the Software or this
license without the express written consent of TPS. This license is
effective until terminated. You may terminate the license at any time
by destroying the Software and Manual. TPS may terminate the
license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions. You
agree to destroy the Software and manual upon termination of your
use of the Product. All ownership, copyright and other intellectual
property rights in and to the Software belong to TPS. If these license
terms are not acceptable, return any unused Software and the Manual.
CONFIDENTIALITY This Manual, its contents and the Software
(collectively, the “Confidential Information”) are the confidential and
proprietary information of TPS. You agree to treat TPS’ Confidential
Information with a degree of care no less stringent than the degree of
care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable trade
secrets. Nothing in this paragraph shall restrict you from disclosing
Confidential Information to your employees as may be necessary or
appropriate to operate or care for the Product. Such employees must
also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential. In the event you
become legally compelled to disclose any of the Confidential
Information, you shall give TPS immediate notice so that it may seek a
protective order or other appropriate remedy.
WEBSITE; OTHER STATEMENTS No statement contained at the
TPS website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements or
TPS literature or made by an employee or independent contractor of
TPS modifies these Terms and Conditions (including the Software
License Agreement, Disclaimer of Warranty and limitation of
liability).
SAFETY Improper use of a Topcon Product can lead to injury to
persons or property and/or malfunction of the Product. The Product
should only be repaired by authorized TPS warranty service centers.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 2-15


Users should review and heed the safety warnings in the manual
accompanying the Product.
MISCELLANEOUS The above Terms and Conditions may be
amended, modified, superseded, or canceled, at any time by TPS. The
above Terms and Conditions will be governed by, and construed in
accordance with, the laws of the State of California, without reference
to conflict of laws.

Manual Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
Example Explanation
FileExit tap the File menu and tap Exit.
Enter Indicates the button or key labeled Enter.
Notes Indicates a field on a dialog box or screen, or a tab
within a dialog box or screen.
Topo Indicates the name of a dialog box or screen

TIP TIP
Supplementary information that can help you configure,
maintain, or set up a system.

NOTICE NOTICE
Supplementary information that can have an affect on
system operation, system performance, measurements,
personal safety.

2-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 1

Introduction
Introduction MAGNET Field
MAGNET Field is a field application of the MAGNET software
system that also includes the office and the web service (MAGNET
Enterprise) applications. Data from the field and office applications
can be used by MAGNET Enterprise for graphical representation of
the project on the Enterprise Google map.
This Help provides information for the MAGNET Field application.
For help using the other applications of the MAGNET software
system, refer to the application Help.
To work with a fully featured MAGNET Field, you need to activate it.
After successfully installing the application on the device, you are
prompted to activate the Product using the Activation Manager
wizard, which guides you through the process.

NOTICE NOTICE
Once activated MAGNET Field does not require a new
activation after updating.
If you cancel activation, the application will run in Demo mode,
which allows you to store up to five points. Also, you can clear the
Activate MAGNET Field now check box at the end of the MAGNET
Field installation to work in Demo mode.
The activated MAGNET Field will prompt you to establish
Connections with the Device before opening a job and with the
Enterprise project to exchange data.
When the connection with the device is established, the Home screen
is displayed.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 1-1


Introduction

Connections
When MAGNET Field runs for the first time, click the Home button

to open the Home screen for the default job. Then you can
create a job with a required configuration to work.
On each subsequent MAGNET Field startup, the Connections dialog
runs for the current job.

Home screen
Click an icon to open the folder or execute the command:

Job
Manages jobs.

Configure
Manages job configurations.

Exchange
Exchanges data between an active job and other jobs,
files and enterprise projects.

Chat
Chats with online recipients.

Edit
Edits existing job data.

Calculate
Calculates various coordinate geometry tasks.

1-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Home screen

Map
Shows the current job data on the map.

Connect
Switches between GPS and optical instruments, and sets
connections with the instrument, a network, and with
MAGNET Enterprise.

Setup
Sets up surveying: GPS+ survey or Optical (Total
Station) survey. Unavailable for Level configuration
style.

Survey
Conducts a survey: GPS+ survey or Optical survey. Not
available for a GPS static and Level surveys.

Two Peg Test


Performs the Two Peg Test for a Level survey.

Level Run
Sets up a Level survey in running mode.

Stake
Stakes different objects.

Apps
Uses applications that are pre-installed on the same
device as the MAGNET Field.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 1-3


Introduction

The top banner of the home screen shows the name of the job that is
open and associate icons:

Options
Provides access to Help files and options that are
specific to the current open screen.

Indicates the power status of the controller battery.

Indicates the connection status with the enterprise: a


green check mark means there is an established
connection and a red cross means that the connection is
off. You can connect/reconnect in the Connections
dialog.

Indicates the connection status with the device. You can


connect/reconnect with the device in the Connections
dialog. If the device is disconnected, the indicator is
grey. When connecting, it turns yellow, then green, and
finally turns into the image of the connected device with
a green check mark near it.

Closes the program.

Returns to the home screen.

Help Options
Click the icon to open a menu of options which may be useful for
you. Every screen and dialog in MAGNET Field has such an icon in

1-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Help Options

the top left corner, the menu, opened by clicking the icon, always
contains the Help option and may contain some additional options
specific to the current screen.
The help options for the home screen and for every folder are as
follows:
Help
Access help files.
Keyboard
Check mark to enable type entries in a dialog's fields using the
soft keyboard.
Chats
Click Chats -> Create New to configure a chat with the MAGNET
Enterprise users. Find out more...
Port Data Logging
Click to view incoming and outgoing traffic information of a
controller port connected to MAGNET Field. Find out more...
Activate Modules
Click to view or change the license activation of the modules in
MAGNET Field. Find out more...
About
Click to view basic information about MAGNET Field software.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 1-5


Introduction

Notes:

1-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 2

Managing Jobs
Click the Job icon on the Home screen to manage jobs. Jobs include
all data collected in surveys of different configurations.

Job folder
Upon installation, MAGNET Field only contains and opens the
default job.
Click an icon to manage your jobs:

New Job
Creates a new job.

Open Job
Makes a selected job current.

Delete Job
Deletes a selected job from data storage.

Job Info
Shows information about a current job.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 2-1


Managing Jobs

New Job
The new job creation process is performed with the help of a Wizard.

indicates the directory in which this job will be created. The


last specified file path is retained.
To create a new job:
1. In Name, enter a name for the job.

NOTICE NOTICE
The Job name length should not exceed 63 characters and
contain any of the following symbols:

!,?%*@#$%^&'"\/|~;[]{}()<>`+=.

2. Optionally, in Created by, enter any identifier of the person


creating the job.
3. Optionally, in Comments, enter a description for the job.
4. Current date displays the date and time when the job is being
created.
5. Click Browse if required to save the New Job file in a folder

different from that indicates.

6. Click at this step if you want the new job to use the
settings from the last opened job as the default settings. The
new job becomes the current job, and the Home menu displays
with the job name in the title area.
7. Click Next to follow the wizard to complete the required steps.

2-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Job folder

NOTICE NOTICE

Clicking during any of the following step creates


the new job with the settings that were configured in all the
previous steps (including the opened one).

8. Select the Survey Style or create a new configuration, and click


Next. A Survey Configuration is a set of parameters that does
not depend upon the job. A Configuration can be used by
different Jobs. More...
9. Configure the Coordinate System settings required for the job,
and then click Next. More...
10. Specify the Units for the job, and then click Next. More...
11. Configure the Display parameters for coordinates, azimuths
and positions on roads, and then click Next. More...
12. Set Alarms for various situations. More...

13. Click to open the Home menu for the newly created
job. The title of the Home menu will be the current job name.
When opening the job the Connections screen displays by
default.

Open Job
Upon starting, MAGNET Field always opens the last used job after
the product activation and Connections are performed.
All existing jobs that are created/opened with MAGNET Field are

defined as .mjf files and have the symbol .


To open an existing job:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 2-3


Managing Jobs

1. From the Job Name list, highlight the name of the job you want
to open.
The Created and Modified fields will display when the job was
created and last modified.

will show the directory in which this job resides. By


default the job files are stored in the [program]\Jobs folder.
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job in another folder if
required.

3. Click to open the job. The Home screen displays.


To open job backups of existing jobs:
1. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job.
2. In the File Types drop-down list, select MAGNET Field Job
Backups (*.mjf.bak).

3. Highlight the name of the job to be opened, and click .


To open a job that was created in TopSURV:
1. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job.
2. In the File Types drop-down list, select TopSURV Job Files
(*.tsj) or TopSURV Job Backups (*.tsj.bak).

3. Highlight the name of the job to be opened, and click .

Delete Job
Current Job: shows the name of the current job.
To delete a job:
1. From the Job Name list, highlight the name of the job you want
to delete.

2-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Job folder

The Created and Modified fields will display when the job was
created and last modified.

will show the directory in which this job resides. By


default the job files are stored in the [program]\Jobs folder.
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired job in another folder if
required.

3. Click to delete the job. A confirmation message displays.


4. Click Yes to confirm deletion or No to cancel, and return to the
Job folder.

NOTICE NOTICE
When deleting a job, MAGNET Field automatically deletes
all associated files (the job history file, images, etc.).

Job Info
Displays information about:
• The current job in general
• The settings in the job
• The currently connected receiver:
– Receiver firmware version
– Receiver OAF expiration date (for nearest expired option).
Click on this date to expand a full list of OAF options.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 2-5


Managing Jobs

Browse
The title of this dialog depends on the path from which it is called.

displays the path to the current folder where you will search
for a desired file:
1. Use an icon to:

move up a folder

create a new folder

switch the display mode for the list of


files to the detailed view

switch the display mode for the list of


files to the icon view

2. From the Type drop-down list, select the type of files to display
in the list for the current folder.
3. In Name, enter the name of the file to select or select the desired
file from the list.

2-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 3

Configuring Jobs
Click the Configure icon on the Home screen to configure settings
for the current job.

Configure Folder
Click an icon to configure the settings:

Survey
Creates or edits a survey configuration.

Coordinate System
Sets a coordinate system for the job. Allows Grid to
Ground transformation (find out more...).

Global
Logs the current job history to the file and connects with
the instrument at the startup prompt.

Backup
Changes the directory to save job backups.

Units
Sets default units to be used in the job.

Display
Customizes the interface to display data in the job.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-1


Configuring Jobs

Alarms
Sets alarm parameters.

Menus
Shows / hides functions in the menus.

Codes
Sets code global parameters.

Stake Reports
Configures reports for staking.

Enterprise
Configures the user account to enter into MAGNET
Enterprise.

Configuring a New Job


When creating a new job, a wizard guides you through all of the steps
needed to setup the new job configuration. If required to change the
settings for the current job, use the options of the Configure folder.

Select Survey Configuration


Survey Configuration is a set of parameters that control a survey,
define communication between devices, measure and store points.
MAGNET Field contains some default configurations for different
types of surveys with GNSS receivers and optical instruments. If the
defaults do not suit your needs, you can create a new configuration for

your survey. To do this, click . When you have created the new
configuration, the name of this configuration will appear in the list.

3-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Configuring a New Job

To set a survey configuration for the job:


• From the GPS+ Config drop-down list of available
configurations, select the required configuration.
• From the Optical Config drop-down list of available
configurations, select the configuration for the Total Station or
Level mode.
• After selecting the survey configurations for your job, click

to store settings, which will be used each time you start a


survey, and to return to the Home screen.

NOTICE NOTICE
Both types of configurations can be selected for one job.
They will be used with the device selected upon
Connections: Optical or GPS+.

Configurations
The Configurations dialog presents a list of available survey
configurations: names and types. Survey configurations are stored in
the Styles.tsstyles file in the MAGNET Field directory. Magnet Field
contains a list of pre-defined configurations that you can use or
modify.
You can customize the list of the configurations to include only ones
you need:
• Highlight the name of the configuration.
• Click the Delete button to remove the configuration from the list.
• Click the Edit button to change the highlighted configuration to
suit your survey preferences.
• Click the Add button to create a new configuration.
Creating / editing a survey configuration is accomplished with the
help of a Wizard. Find out more... on GPS+ configurations and
more... on optical configurations.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-3


Configuring Jobs

Coordinate System
To set the coordinate system for the Job:
1. Select the Projection to be used in the job. MAGNET Field has
many pre-defined projections and tabular projections, which are
selected during the MAGNET Field installation.
2. Use Grid/Ground to convert to ground coordinates if required.
3. Specify the Datum as required. MAGNET Field has a lot of
cataloged datums.
4. Select the Geoid to bring to elevations if necessary. MAGNET
Field has a lot of geoid files, which are selected on MAGNET
Field installation.
Find out more...

Units
You can set different units and the precision for how MAGNET Field
will display various numerical values in dialogs:
• Distance (including area and volume)
• Angle
• Coordinate precision
• Temperature and pressure
On the Distance tab, select as required:
• Distance unit for any length values. That can be Meters; IFeet - (1
International ft = 0.3048 m); US Feet (1 US survey ft = 1200/
3937 m); IFeet and Inches, US Feet and Inches (the latter two are
calculated by taking into account that 1 ft = 12 in), IChains (1
International ch = 66 International ft) or USChains (1 US survey
ch = 66 US survey ft).

3-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Configuring a New Job

NOTICE NOTICE
If the selected units are USfeet, linear values can be
entered as meters or IFeet by appending "m" or "if" to the
entered value. If the selected units are in meters, then a
linear value in USFeet or International feet can be entered
by appending "f" or "if" to the end of the entered value. If
the selected units are in IFeet, linear values can be entered
as meters or USfeet by appending "m" or "f" to the entered
value. The appended characters "m", "f", or "if" are case
insensitive. In other words, enter "M", "F", or "IF".

NOTICE NOTICE
When using IFeet and Inches or US Feet and Inches the
following format is observed: f.iix, where f is feet, ii is
inches and x is 1/8th of an inch.

• Distance precision for the number of decimal places in length


values.

NOTICE NOTICE
To display only integers, select "0" and so on. To display 5
decimal places, select "0.12345".

• Area unit for area values


• Volume unit for volume values
On the Angle tab, select as required:
• Angle unit for angular values. That can be DMS, represented as
ddd mm ss (the full circle contains 360 degrees) or Grads (Gons)
- the full circle contains 400 grads (gons).

NOTICE NOTICE
Azimuth can be entered as two points separated by "-", ","
or ";". Certain angles can be entered as three points

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-5


Configuring Jobs

separated by "-", "," or ";". For instance a value of 100-101


indicates the Azimuth from Point 100 to Point 101.

• Angle precision for the number of decimal places in angular


values. More...
• COGO angle unit for angular values in COGO tasks. In addition
to Angle unit settings, that also can be Radians (the full circle
contains 2*PI radians); or Mils (1 Mil = 1 Milliradian = 1/1000 of
a Radian)
• COGO angle precision for the number of decimal places in
angular values in COGO tasks. More...
On the Coordinate tab, select as required:
• Northing/Easting precision for the number of decimal places in
Northing/Easting coordinates. More...
• Lat/Lon precision for the number of decimal places in latitude/
longitude seconds.
• Height precision for the number of decimal places in ellipsoidal
heights and elevations. More...
On the Other tab, select if necessary:
• Temperature unit only for the raw measurements. That can be
Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F).
• Pressure unit only for the raw measurements. That can be mmHg,
hPa, inHg or mbar.

Display
You can configure the display of the following settings:
• Coordinate Type to view coordinates for the coordinate system
selected
• Coordinate Order to display: Northing/Easting/Height or
Easting/Northing/Height, X/Y/Z or Y/X/Z

3-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Configuring a New Job

• Azimuth Origin to display the azimuth computed from either


reference directions: North, South, East, or West
• Disp Dir As to view directions as bearings or azimuths
• Disp CL Pos As to display stations or chainages (distance along
the centerline) for stationing the centerline
• Full Station to set one full station that was always 100 units
traditionally
For example, when using 100 m as a full station, a position at the
distance of 341.256 m (chainage) from station 0 + 00 is designated 3
+ 41.256. The numbers to the left of the plus are hundreds of meters
(even full stations) and to the right of the plus are tens and units of
meters to the nearest 0.001 m (a remainder of a station).

Alarms
You can configure alert conditions:
• On the Main tab, check Audible Alarm to enable audible alarms.
The alert will sound automatically when an alert situation occurs.
• On the Controller tab, place check marks in the Power Alarm and
Memory Alarm boxes to select the alert conditions of low power
and memory in the controller.
• On the GPS+ tab, place check marks in the Power Alarm and
Memory Alarm, Radio Link and Fix-Float boxes to select the alert
conditions of low power and memory, poor radio link, and loss of
initialization in the GNSS receiver.
• On the Optical tab, place check marks in the Power Alarm and
Track boxes to select the alert conditions of low power and loss of
the target in automatic tracking mode for optical instruments.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-7


Configuring Jobs

GPS Survey Configurations


To create a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in
the Configurations list.
2. Select the survey Type that depends on the equipment you will
use and the results you need to obtain.
MAGNET Field provides configurations for the following GPS+
survey types:
• RTK
• Network RTK
• Network DGPS
• Real Time DGPS
• Generic NMEA
• PP Static
• PP Kinematic
• PP DGPS
3. From the Corrections drop-down list, select the type of
correction data that will be used for survey if the Network RTK,
RT DGPS, or Network DGPS survey type is chosen.
4. If required to log rover data for post-processing in a real-time
survey, select and enable the Post Processing box.
5. Click Next. The wizard will set default parameters specific for
the equipment selected.

Receiver Make
Set general conditions for the survey, and click Next:
• To access GPS real-time surveys and stake routines without using
real hardware, select the Simulation mode check box.
• In the Rover field, designate the Manufacturer of the rover
receiver. MAGNET Field supports Topcon and Sokkia.

3-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

• In the Base field, designate the Manufacturer of the base receiver,


if required.
• Select the Post Processing check box to store raw observations
and process them later.

RTK Survey
Real-Time Kinematic survey implies use of a pair of receivers
operating simultaneously and a radio link established between the two
receivers. From a functional point of view, the two receivers will
differ from each other. One of the receivers (a Base) is located at a
fixed point with known coordinates. The base receiver will transmit
the data via a radio link to the other receiver (a Rover) to compute
differential corrections. To establish a proper connection between the
two receivers, specify the necessary communication parameters first.
To configure an RTK survey:
• Configure the base receiver
• Configure the base radio
• Configure the rover receiver
• Configure the rover radio

Base Receiver
To configure the base receiver:
1. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the receiver
you are using as the base. 
Note: Topcon Generic selection will work with all receiver
models including GR-3 but some functionality, like automatic
SBAS satellites tracking, will not be accessible.
2. The Ext. Receiver box is always checked and is enabled for
devices that have internal receivers. The connection for external
receivers can be Bluetooth and Serial.
3. Set Elevation Mask. Usually the default 13 degrees is
appropriate. Data from satellites below this elevation will not
be used.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-9


Configuring Jobs

4. From RTK Format, select the format for the differential


corrections data transmitted by the base radio.
5. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the type of the antenna
used at the base.
6. Set the Antenna Height and height type. The height type can be
either Vertical when the height is measured to an ARP (the
antenna reference point, usually the middle bottom of the
antenna) or Slant when the height is measured to the antenna
edge.
7. Click Peripherals to enable the Multiple Ports option if needed
to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver to
peripherals.
8. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver’s
internal battery if it is available. To do this, select the Receiver
Settings option from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking

in the top left corner. More...


9. Optionally, you can set relative calibrations for the base
antenna. To do this, click Use relative calibrations in the pop-

up menu (the check will appear near the option name).


The default is the use of absolute calibrations. All antenna
calibrations are referenced to the ARP. You can find details on
antenna calibrations at the NGS site here.
10. Click Next.

Base Peripherals
Select the Multiple Ports check box, and then select the number of
ports to use for base output if required.
Additional dialogs will appear later in the wizard sequence to setup
parameters for each port.

3-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

Receiver Settings
When an external power supply is used at the base, and the receiver
charger mode is turned on, it supplies power to the receiver battery.
You can connect an external power supply without charging the
receiver battery.
To do this:
1. Select the Turn Charger Mode Off check box.

2. Click to save the setting.

Radio
Radio modems are used in GPS real-time surveys. The base radio is
intended for transmitting differential corrections and the rover radio is
used for receiving them. Also, there can be some radios that may be
configured for output NMEA messages if required.
To configure the radio:
1. Select the Radio Modem type from the list of pre-defined
modem types. The list contents depends upon the survey
configuration and the receiver model selected.
Note: For a Network survey, in the Network Type field, select
either the existing network connection or dialup.
2. If you use a AirLink CDMA or GPRS radio modem, select the
Modem Register option from the pop-up menu that displays by

clicking in the top left corner to register the radio


modem. More...
3. Optionally, you can configure RE-S1 Repeater for the rover
radio. To do this, select the Config RE-S1 Repeater option from

the pop-up menu that displays by clicking in the top


left corner. More...

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-11


Configuring Jobs

4. Specify communication parameters for the receiver Port that


the radio is connected to: Parity, the number of Data bits, Baud
rate, the number of Stop bits, which are specific to the
connected modem.
5. If required, click Defaults to return all the communication
parameters to the default settings.
6. Click Next to specify the Radio Parameters.

Modem Register
AirLink GPRS and AirLink CDMA require registration.
To register the modem:
1. Select Provider.
2. Enter Register Information: Net ID, Password and Phone
Number.
3. Click the Defaults button to set the default data.
4. Click the Register button to pass registration.

Radio Parameters
Specify parameters for the radio selected:
• AirLink GPRS, CDMA, CDPD1, CDMA2000, Generic, Sierra
Wireless MP200 CDPD modem types do not require setting any
parameters for the base radio.
• Other modems require additional parameters to be set.

For more information see:

AirLink CDMA(MUDP)
Digital UHF
FH915Plus
Internal Satel
Internal HiPer Lite Radio
Pacific Crest
UHF Satel

3-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

Cellular Modem
Internal CDMA
Rover AirLink CDMA
Rover AirLink CDPD
Rover AirLink GPRS
Rover Internal CDMA

Base Multicast
To set IP addresses for communication between the base and several
rovers using UDP protocol:
1. In the Address to Add field, enter the IP address as required.
2. Click Add to add the IP address to the list.
The IP Addresses list displays all IP addresses available.
3. Click Delete to delete an address from the list.

Cell Phone
To set phone information:
1. For the base radio, enter the Base PIN.
2. For the rover radio, enter the Rover PIN and the Base Phone
Number that can be added to a Phone number list.

Digital UHF
To set parameters for the Digital UHF radio:
1. Select the Revision type of digital UHF radio used: either
Digital UHF or Digital UHF II.
2. Select an appropriate operation Protocol for data transmitting/
receiving:
• Simplex is the default. This is ArWest’s proprietary protocol.
It only works with other ArWest (Digital UHF) radios.
• Trimble works with Trimble Trim Talk and Trim Mark
Radios.
• PDL works with existing PDL radios and Hiper XTs set in
PDL mode.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-13


Configuring Jobs

3. Select the type of Modulation for the radio modem. Select


either DBPSK/DQPSK if using the Simplex protocol or GMSK
if using Trimble or PDL.
4. Select the channel Spacing step: either 12.5 or 25 kHz or Do
not set (the default). This is a hardware set.
5. Enable/Disable Scrambling: either Set up (the default) or Don’t
set up. When set up, it provides more robust data
communication over high interference areas.

FH915 Plus
To set parameters for the FH915 Plus radio:
1. Select the Location to adjust the frequency range and RF power
level depending on the country.
2. Set the operation Protocol. Select FH915 Ext if all receivers on
the job site are equipped with FH915Plus radios.
3. Set the Channel number. This feature allows up to ten
simultaneously transmitting radio modems, without
interference, at the job site (1 is the default).

Int Satel Parms


To set parameters for the internal Satel radio:
1. Select Satel FCS On (default) or Satel FCS Off. In Free
Channel Scan mode, the radio modem will regularly scan the
current operating frequency and under certain conditions it can
switch to the next frequency.
2. Or select PDL (PacCrest) operation protocol.

Internal HiPer Lite


Set the Channel number. This feature allows up to five
simultaneously transmitting radio modems, without interference, at
the job site (1 is the default).

Pacific Crest Radio Parms


To set parameters for the Pacific Crest radio:

3-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

1. Select the Channel number from 0 to 15.


2. Set the Sensitivity of the radio to Low, Medium or High, or turn
it Off.

UHF Modem
To set parameters for the internal UHF radio:
1. Select the compatibility Protocol.
2. Set the Channel number.
3. Select the output Power value for the base radio.

Satel Radio Parms


To set parameters for the Satel radio:
1. Select the Model of the Satel modem.
2. Select the Channel number. Frequency displays the
corresponding value for the channel number selected.
3. If required, set PCC Mode (Pacific Crest Corporation).
4. In FEC, select if you want to use the Forward Error Correction
technique to maximize data communication.

Rover CDMA Parms


Set the IP address for communication between the rover and the base.
1. Enter the CDMA address of the base radio in the Base CDMA
Address field.
2. Press Add to add the address to the IP Addresses list.

Rover CDPD Parms


To set the IP address for communication between the rover and the
base.
1. Enter the CDPD address of the base radio in the Base CDPD
Address field.
2. Press Add to add the address to the IP Addresses list.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-15


Configuring Jobs

Rover GPRS Parms


To set the IP address for communication between the rover and the
base:
1. Enter the GPRS address of the base in the Base GPRS Address
field.
2. Press Add to add the address to the IP addresses list.

Rover Receiver
To configure the rover receiver:
1. From the Receiver Model list, select the model of the receiver
you are using as the rover. Note: Topcon Generic selection will
work with all receiver models including GR-3 but some
functionality, like automatic SBAS satellites tracking, will not
be accessible.
2. The Ext. Receiver box is always checked and unavailable for
every receiver model in the Receiver Model list except GRS-1.
MAGNET Field directly installed on the GRS-1 can use 
GRS-1’s internal GPS receiver.
3. Set an Elevation Mask. Typically the default 13 degrees is
appropriate for the base and rover. Satellites below this
elevation will not be considered.
4. From RTK Format, select the format for the differential
corrections data transmitted by the rover radio.
5. In Network survey, set the Protocol for data transmission:
NTRIP, direct TCP/IP, or CSD technology.
6. From the Antenna drop-down list, select the correct antenna
type used on the rover side.
7. To set the default antenna height, enter a value in the Antenna
Height field. The height type can be set to either Vertical when
the height is measured to an ARP (the antenna reference point,
usually the middle bottom of the antenna) or Slant when the
height is measured to the antenna edge.
8. Click Peripherals to enable options to configure selected
peripherals in the dialogs later. More...

3-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

9. Optionally, you can turn off the charger mode for the receiver’s
internal battery. To do this, select the Receiver Settings option

from the pop-up menu that displays by clicking in the


top left corner. More...
10. Optionally, you can instruct the rover to use relative
calibrations on the base. To do this, click Relative calibrations

on base in the pop-up menu (the check will appear


near the option name). The default is the use of absolute
calibrations. All antenna calibrations are referenced to the ARP.
You can find details on Antenna Calibrations at the NGS site
here.
11. In Network RTK survey you can set a fixed position for a GGA
message from the rover receiver. To do this, click Use fixed
GGA position in the pop-up menu to enable and Set fixed GGA
position. More...

Position for GGA


If required, set a fixed position for GGA message from the rover
receiver.
You can do this in one of the following ways:
1. Click the Map selection button and select the point on the map.
The point position values appear in the coordinate fields.
2. Click the List selection button and select the point in the list.
The point position values appear in the coordinate fields.
3. Enter the coordinate values in the edit fields.

RE-S1 FH915 Repeater


If required, the RE-S1 modem can be used as a stand-alone repeater
to increase the range between the Base and Rover in spread spectrum
systems.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-17


Configuring Jobs

To configure the RE-S1 Repeater:


1. Select the Enable RE-S1 Repeater configuration check box to
enable further configuration of the RE-S1 as a repeater.
2. From Connect Type, select the type of connection of the
repeater: either to the Receiver or to the Controller to setup the
modem.
3. In Connect Port Setup set the properties of the connection port.
Press Defaults to set the port properties to the default values.
4. Press Next and configure the modem parameters:
• Select the Location to adjust the frequency range and RF
power level depending on the country.
• Set the operation Protocol.
• Set the Channel number. This feature allows up to ten
simultaneously transmitting radio modems, without
interference, at the job site (1 is the default).

Rover Receiver Peripherals


If required, select any option to work with peripherals:
1. Select the NMEA Ports check box to configure the output of the
NMEA messages. Select the number of ports from the drop-

down list that appears and click . Additional dialogs


will appear later in the wizard sequence to setup parameters for
each port and specify NMEA messages for output. More...
2. Select the Multiple Ports check box to configure multibase
input for the rover. Select the number of ports from the drop-

down list that appears and click . Additional dialogs


will appear later in the wizard sequence to setup parameters for
each port. Note: Use only one radio to receive corrections from
the base.

3-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

3. Select the mmGPS+ check box to configure the mmGPS+


system. Click Parameters to specify them. More...
4. Select the External Laser check box to configure the laser
device that can be connected either directly to the Controller or
through the Receiver. Click Parameters to specify them. More...

Output NMEA
To configure the NMEA Messages for output:
1. Select the check boxes near the types of messages as required.
More...
2. Select the Set GP as Receiver Talker ID check box to instruct
the receiver to use "GP" as Talker ID in appropriate NMEA
sentences generated. This enables support of Goggle Maps that
cannot recognize default "GN" or "GL" as Talker IDs in these
messages.
3. Enter the Interval in seconds in which the application will
output the messages (up to 0.1 sec.).

List of NMEA messages


The following NMEA Messages are available for output:
• GSA to output the operation mode of the GNSS receiver, the
satellite used for positioning, and DOP.
• GLL to output data on the current latitude/longitude and
positioning mode.
• VTG to output the traveling direction and velocity.
• GRS to output the residual error of distance for each satellite.
This is used to support RAIM.
• ZDA to output the UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone.
• GST to output the statistics of position errors.
• GNS to output data on time, position, and positioning of
GPS+GLONASS (GNSS).
• GGA to output data on time, position, and positioning.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-19


Configuring Jobs

• GSV to output the number of satellites, satellite number, elevation


angle, azimuthal angle, and SNR.
• HDT to output the direction (heading).
• P_ATT to output attitude parameters.
• RMC to output time, date, position, course and speed data
provided by a GNSS navigation receiver.
• ROT to output rate of turn.
• GMP to output GNSS map projection fix data.

mmGPS+
In mmGPS aided RTK survey, a wireless sensor connected to the
Rover picks up the signals from the laser transmitter for accurate
(millimeter) elevations.

NOTICE NOTICE
When measuring the height of the Rover antenna, include
the height of the sensor with a 5/8 inch plug.
To configure the mmGPS+:
1. Select the Receiver port, which is connected to the mmGPS+
Sensor.
2. Select the Sensor Gain to adjust the gain on the mmGPS+
Sensor. Select Auto to automatically control the mmGPS
receiver’s detection level of the transmitter’s signal.
3. Enter the Height Difference Limit value to set the threshold for
the difference between GPS and mmGPS+ height
measurements. If the GPS+ height and mmGPS+ height differ
by more than the amount entered, the mmGPS+ icon will
change to warn the user.

Laser Configuration
To configure the External Laser instrument connected to the Receiver
or to the Controller:

3-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

1. Select the laser Manufacturer. Currently, Magnet Field supports


MDL and Laser Technology, Inc.
2. Select the Model of the Laser Instrument.
3. Select the Type of laser measurement system if it uses Encoding
or not.
4. Set Laser Port Setting including port, parity, data, baud and
stop rates to connect to the Laser Instrument.

Survey Parameters
The survey parameters are associated with the type of the survey.
To set the parameters that will be used during a survey:
1. From the Solution Type drop-down list, select the solution type
for each position computation in a real-time survey as required.
Data will be considered only if the solution type satisfies this
selection. What is displayed in the list for selection depends on
the type of selected survey. There can be a combination of the
following solution types:
• Fixed mmGPS+: indicates that the positions were Fixed Only
solution with mmGPS+ calculated height.
• Fixed Only: indicates that positions were computed by the
RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from Base
and Rover receivers. Integer ambiguities were fixed.
• Float mmGPS+: indicates that the positions were Float
solution with mmGPS+ calculated height.
• Float: indicates that the positions were computed by the RTK
engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and
rover receivers. Integer ambiguities, however, were NOT
fixed. (Their float estimates were used instead.)
• DGPS: indicates that the positions were achieved using the
pseudo-range measurements from base and rover receivers.
• All: indicates that the positions were computed using all the
epochs accepted, including autonomous solutions.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-21


Configuring Jobs

• Auto: indicates autonomous positions when differential


corrections are not available.
2. In the Auto Accept field, set the following parameters for auto-
storing positions in a stationary survey:
• Select the Num Meas to Avg check box and, if it is to be used
in the logging, in the edit field enter the number of
measurements required before a point can be saved. The
default is 3.
• Select the Precision check box and, if they are taken into
account, in the edit fields enter the horizontal and vertical
accuracy in meters required before a point can be saved. The
defaults are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively.
• Note: If both the check boxes are selected, both these
conditions must be satisfied before the point is saved.
3. In the Auto Topo field, set the following parameters for auto
storing positions in the dynamic survey:
• From the Method drop-down list, select the method for
setting the interval between the received epochs: by time, by
horizontal distance, or by slope distance.
• In the Interval edit field enter the value of this interval.

NOTICE NOTICE
Every survey parameter can be changed with the help of
the Settings button from any Survey screen in GPS+ mode.

Stakeout Parameters
To set the parameters that will be used during a GPS stakeout:
1. In the Hz Dist Tolerance edit field, enter the horizontal distance
tolerance value. This is used to determine when you are close
enough to the point for the bull’s eye to show up.
2. From the Reference Direction drop-down list, select the
reference direction that will be used in point stakeout. It can be

3-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

North, moving direction, or the direction to the reference point


(azimuth).
3. From the Solution Type drop-down list, select the solution type
to filter the type of solutions that will be used for the stakeout.
There can be a combination of the following solution types:
• Fixed mmGPS+: indicates that the positions were Fixed Only
solution with mmGPS+ calculated height.
• Fixed Only: indicates that positions were computed by the
RTK engine using the carrier phase measurements from Base
and Rover receivers. Integer ambiguities were fixed.
• Float mmGPS+: indicates that the positions were Float
solution with mmGPS+ calculated height.
• Float: indicates that the positions were computed by the RTK
engine using the carrier phase measurements from base and
rover receivers. Integer ambiguities, however, were NOT
fixed. (Their float estimates were used instead.)
• DGPS: indicates that the positions were achieved using the
pseudo-range measurements from base and rover receivers.
• All: indicates that the positions were computed using all the
epochs accepted, including autonomous solutions.
• Auto: indicates autonomous positions when differential
corrections are not available.
4. In the Auto Accept field, set the following parameters for the
auto-storing of staked points:
• Select the Num Meas to Avg box if required to use the number
of measurements to average before logging a point. The
default is 3. If you want to enter your own number, enter the
value in the field.
• Select the Precision box if required to take into account the
horizontal and vertical precision tolerances for GPS vector in
meters that should be met before a point is saved. The
defaults are 0.015 m and 0.030 m, respectively. If you want to
enter your own precision tolerances, enter the values in the
fields.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-23


Configuring Jobs

NOTICE NOTICE
If both the boxes are checked, both these conditions must
be satisfied before the point is saved.

5. Select the Display option from the pop-up menu that appears by

clicking in the top left corner of the dialog if required


to specify an icon for the staked point. More...
6. Click Next to set the parameters for storing staked points in the
Store Staked Point As fields:
• The Point name can be set to the design point, next point,
design point with a predefined prefix, design point with a
predefined suffix. More...
• The Note can be set to the design point, design point with a
prefix or design point with a suffix. More...

Defining names for the staked points


The Point name can be set to either design point name, next point
name, design point with a pre-defined prefix (that is, stk_01, where
“stk_” is the prefix), or design point with a pre-defined suffix. The
choice of the prefix or suffix appears only when the corresponding
item is chosen from the drop-down menu. Also, a specified numerical
constant can be added to automatically generate the staked point
name. For instance, if the constant specified is 1000, and the design
point is 100, the staked point would be named 1100 (that is,
100+1000). If the design point is alphanumeric, the constant is
appended to the name. For example, for the design point ALPHA, the
corresponding staked out point is named ALPHA1000.

Setting notes for the staked points


The Note can be set to either design point name, design point with a
prefix, or design point with a suffix. Also, it can be Station & Offset
information. If the Station & Offset option is activated, an edit box for
entering an alphanumeric prefix appears. For the United States, this

3-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets the prefix is “Cha”, and
for the Korean/Japanese markets the prefix is “No”. With this option
activated, depending on the choice for the prefix, MAGNET Field
automatically generates one note for each stakeout point:
Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.

Staked Point Icon


To define the icon for staked points to display on the map:
1. Select the Use icon for staked point box to enable settings.
2. In the Staked Point field:
• From the Icon drop-down list select the icon appearance that will
be reflected in the window.

• In the Color field press the button to set the color for the
icon in the dialog. More...

Color Palette
This palette allows you to select the color for the objects to be
displayed on the map.
To do this:
1. Click on the box of the desired color to highlight it.
2. Click the ok button to return to the Staked Point Icon dialog to
view the colored icon.

Advanced Parameters
This dialog allows you to change advanced signal processing
parameters:
• The Satellite System to use from the default GPS and GLONASS
to GPS only.
• From RTK Position, the method of RTK corrections definition:
Extrapolation or Matched Epoch (sometimes described as
asynchronous or synchronous, respectively).

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-25


Configuring Jobs

• Select the Track L2C Satellites check box to enable L2C signal
tracking.
• Select the Track L5 Satellites check box to enable L5 signal
tracking.
• By default the Multipath Reduction is selected to enable the use
of a special signal processing technique for reduction of C/A code
phase multipath.
• Select the Co-Op Tracking check box to involve additional
resources for acquisition of the signal, phase- and delay-lock
loops.
• Select the Canopy Environment check box to allow the RTK
engine to use less rigid thresholds when filtering out
measurement outliers. This mode is recommended when working
under tree canopy or in other cases of high multipath.
• From the Base Station Make drop-down list, select the
manufacture of the Base receiver to designate Base Make (IGS
Class) used by the Rover receiver to account for GLONASS
biases.
– Select Other for the base receiver of another class that is
included in the IGS list.
– Select Unknown for the base receiver’s class that is not
included in the IGS list.
– By default, it is set to Automatic Detection to override the
Base Make automatically detected by the Rover receiver if
this information is transmitted by the Base.

NOTICE NOTICE
This option requires a Topcon receiver f/w at rover 3.4 or
higher.

3-26 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


GPS Survey Configurations

• Select the RTK Settings option from the pop-up menu that

appears by clicking in the top left corner of the dialog if


required to set more advanced parameters. More...

Miscellaneous (GPS) Parameters


The Miscellaneous dialog is used to customize the user interface:
• Display coordinates after measurement: when selected (by
default), computed coordinates are displayed automatically after
a GPS measurement is performed and before the point
coordinates are stored into the database.
• Prompt for antenna height: when selected (by default), prompts
for a height of the antenna before a point is stored.
• Beep on storing points: by default this is turned on to beep each
time the point is stored.
• Auto-connect to server: when selected (by default), an automatic
connection to the server is established in a Network survey.
• Check signal quality: select the box to check the signal quality for
the radio link in a Network survey.
• Auto-disconnect from server: when selected (by default), an
automatic disconnection from the server is performed in a
Network survey.

RTK Settings
This dialog allows you to set the following parameters to govern the
RTK engine:
• Ambiguity Level: this three-state parameter is a simplified version
of a float ambiguity fix indicator the RTK engine uses when
fixing integer ambiguities. Low, Medium and High selection
correspond to the indicator's 95%, 99.5% and 99.9% thresholds,
respectively.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-27


Configuring Jobs

The higher the confidence level specified, the longer the integer
ambiguity search time.
• Resolution Period: defines the interval in seconds for Base
Transmission / Rover Reception period at which the ambiguities
estimation is performed.
• Expected Correction: sets the differential correction update
interval for the base station, effective only in the RTK Matched
Epoch mode. The value should be set to the exact rate during
which the base station transmits differential correction data. This
parameter will instruct the rover receiver to output the RTK
position at the same rate at which differential corrections are
updated.

Network RTK
Network Real Time Kinematic is similar to RTK survey but implies
that the Rover uses RTK correction data received from operating
reference station networks to compute its position. Today’s operating
reference station networks are creating various sets of data.
To configure the Network RTK:
1. Name the configuration, and select the Network RTK type in the
Survey dialog.
2. Select the desired Corrections type:
• VRS – to receive Virtual Reference Station data.
• MAC –to use Master-Auxiliary Concept data.
• FKP – to use network area corrections.
• Single Base – to receive RTK corrections from a single base.
• External Config – when the receiver uses an External
program to configure RTK corrections.
3. Configure the Rover Receiver. As required, select one of the
following protocols from the Protocol drop-down list.

3-28 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Network RTK

• NTRIP – select to receive RTK corrections from the Internet


through NTRIP Caster. You have to obtain the user name and
password for NTRIP server.
• TCP/IP – select to receive RTK corrections from the Internet.
• CSD Data – select to use the CSD form of data transmission
to receive RTK corrections via a cellular phone.
4. On the Modem Connect dialog select the device the modem is
connected to.
5. For internet connection, enter the settings in the Modem
Internet Info dialog. If needed, select the Use GPUID box to
turn on the method of GPUID authorization.
6. For server connection, enter the user name and password in the
Login Info dialog.
7. Enter dialup information in the Modem Dialup Info dialog if
required.
8. Select a virtual radio port for data input in the Modem Receiver
Info dialog.
9. For radios connected to the Receiver, configure the receiver
port for connection and the Rover Radio parameters.

Modem Connect
To configure the modem connection:
1. Select Receiver if the modem is connected with the receiver.
2. Select Controller if the modem is connected with the controller.

Modem Dialup Info


To set parameters for a dialup internet connection:
1. Enter the Dialup Number needed to make the internet
connection.
2. Enter the User ID for the server.
3. Enter the Password to log into the server with the entered user
ID.
4. Enter the PIN number for the server.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-29


Configuring Jobs

5. To set the values to default, click the Defaults button.

Modem Internet Info


To enter information for an internet connection:
1. Enter an internet Address that will be used for the connection in
the IP or Web format (select the radio button as required).
2. If required, enter a Name for the address which displays in the
address list.
3. Press Add New to add the address to the Address list. New IP/
Web addresses/ports can be deleted or added to the list.
4. Press Update to update the address in the address list.
5. You can select an address by double-clicking on it in the list.

Login Info
Enter your User ID and Password to log into the server with these
credentials.

Modem Receiver Info


The Virtual Radio Port for AIM (Advanced Input Mode) is
automatically selected from the following default values:
Product Virtual port Virtual port
(BT (Cable
connection) connection)

GR-3 B B

Hiper D B

Hiper II A D

GRS-1 C D

GRX1 A D

3-30 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Network RTK

Network DGPS
Network Differential GPS implies the usage of pseudorange
corrections received from operating differential GPS reference station
networks. The configuration of the Network DGPS survey type is
similar to Network RTK. The difference is that MAC data is not used
and DGPS solutions are derived from Network DGPS survey (see
Survey Parameters).

Real Time DGPS


Real Time Differential GPS implies that the rover receiver uses
differential pseudorange correction data transmitted from DGPS
services. Real Time DGPS survey is used in GIS applications.
A number of differential services exist to transmit differential
correctional data, including maritime radio beacons, geostationary
satellites (as with the OmniSTAR service), and SBAS (Satellite-
Based Augmentation Systems) service.
To configure Real Time DGPS:
1. Name the configuration and select the Real Time DGPS/NMEA
type in the Survey dialog.
2. Select the Corrections type to receive DGPS correction data
from one source of differential corrections as required and also
enabled for the receiver.
3. In Receiver Make, select the manufacturer for the rover
receiver: Topcon or Sokkia. 
Note: When SBAS/Autonomous correction type is selected,
Generic NMEA will appear in the Manufacturer drop-down
selection list.
4. Configure the Rover Receiver.
5. Configure the appropriate parameters for the differential source
selected:
• User Base configuration is similar to RTK
• Beacon
• SBAS/Autonomous

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-31


Configuring Jobs

• CDGPS (Canadian nation-wide DGPS service), specify


communication parameters for the receiver Port that the CDGPS
radio is connected to: Parity, the number of Data bits, Baud rate,
the number of Stop bits.
• OmniSTAR-VBS or OmniSTAR-HP

Config: Beacon
To configure settings for a radio beacon source for differential GPS
corrections:
1. Select the Country where the radio-beacon based differential
service is located.
2. Select the Station that provides broadcasting differential
corrections for the rover.
3. Select the Beacon Corrections from BR-1 check box if required
to use the beacon receiver BR-1 as a source of differential
corrections for the rover.
4. Select the Automatic Scan Mode check box if you want to
enable this mode in BR-1 to get the Beacon signal
automatically. BR-1 will search broadcasting frequencies and
output RTCM corrections from the best signal.

SBAS Setup
This dialog contains settings for the Satellite-Based Augmentation
Systems (WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS) source of differential
correction data. The availability of satellite signals depends upon the
receiver type and location.
To configure SBAS:
1. For GR-3 and other new receivers that support automatic
tracking, you can select one of two options for use of SBAS
satellites: Best Available or Custom.
Note: If the Topcon Generic receiver was selected in the Rover
Receiver dialog, custom setup is required. Not more than two
SBAS satellites can be enabled for tracking in Topcon Generic
receiver.

3-32 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Network RTK

2. For custom selection, Select the boxes near the PRN numbers
of the satellites as required. 
Note: All satellites can be selected. The satellite most available
from those selected will be used in DGPS solution.
• PRN #, Name and Type: These columns will list all possible
SBAS PRN numbers with the respective names of the
satellites and types of satellite systems.
• GPS #: This PRN # applies only to the Topcon Generic
receiver. One of currently unused GPS numbers should be
selected in this column to be able to track this satellite in
Satellite View dialog. To change, click GPS number and
select the appropriate number from the pop-up menu.
3. Enable/disable use of ionospheric corrections from the SBAS
satellite when computing positions. It is recommended to use
ionospheric corrections.
• None: ionospheric corrections are not used
• Apply if avail: use ionospheric corrections if available
• Use sat only if avail: use only the satellites for which
ionospheric corrections are available.

Config: OmniSTAR
For OmniSTAR-VBS and OmniSTAR-HP (a wide-area, satellite
delivered, differential Virtual Base Station and High Performance
GPS services), select the name of the Satellite to be used. The
availability of satellite signals depends upon the receiver type and
location.

Generic NMEA
MAGNET Field supports Real Time DGPS survey on Topcon
controllers with internal NMEA-standard GPS receivers (except
GRS1). Generic NMEA configuration only implies reception of
DGPS correction data from an SBAS system.
To configure this survey type:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-33


Configuring Jobs

1. Name the configuration, and select the Real Time DGPS/NMEA


type in the Survey dialog.
2. Select SBAS/Autonomous in the Corrections drop-down list.
3. In Receiver Make, select Generic NMEA in the Manufacturer
drop-down list.
4. Configure the Rover Receiver. The Receiver Model will be set
to Generic NMEA and Antenna to Unknown.
5. Configure SBAS/Autonomous parameters.

PP Static
Post Processing Static survey is a post-processed survey using raw
GPS data collected by two or more receivers at stationary occupations
for a long period of time. In the office, the software operator
processes the data collected in the field and calculates the relative
position of the receivers. Differential processing takes place when
data from two or more receivers are processed together in order to
compute the receivers relative position. If the coordinates of one
receiver are known, then the coordinates of the other can be
calculated.
To configure the PP Static survey for one static receiver:
1. Name the configuration, and select the PP Static type in the
Survey dialog.
2. Select the receiver vendor in the Receiver Make dialog.
3. Configure Static Receiver.
4. Enter information for the raw data logging in the PP Setup
dialog.
5. Configure the Occupation Times.

PP Setup
Enter information for the raw data logging.
• File name: Select if the name of the receiver file is to be set
automatically or by you. For the user-defined, the corresponding
dialog box will display at the logging start.

3-34 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Network RTK

• Log To: You can log only to the Receiver. Note: In PP DGPS
survey, the raw data logging to the Controller is allowed.
• Logging Rate: Select the logging interval in seconds during
which data is logged to the file. The default depends on the
survey type.
• Start Log: Only for the rover PP setup in PP-enabled surveys, you
can select Manual or Automatic to start logging.

• Log corrections: Only for the rover PP setup in PP-enabled


standard and Network RTK survey (right now for Controller
modem connection only), you can Select this box to allow
logging additional checkout information about RTK mode for
software developers.

Occupation / Initialization Times


This dialog contains timing settings for receiver loggings used in
automatic mode during a PP Survey. 
Note: The occupation times vary based on the number of satellites
and the number of receiver frequencies. A minimum of four satellites
is required.
Select the Initialization time in minutes to define initialization times.
Generally the default settings are appropriate.

PP Kinematic
Post Processing Kinematic implies two receivers. One is fixed, and
the other is moving along some trajectory like in RTK. The
processing of the collected data is performed later, just as it is for the
PP Static type.

PP DGPS
Post Processing Differential GPS implies that the raw observations
made by the Rover and Base receivers in Real Time DGPS has to be
written to files for further processing.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-35


Configuring Jobs

Optical Survey Configurations


To create a new configuration:
1. Enter the Name for the configuration that will be displayed in
the Configurations list.
2. Select the survey Type that depends on the equipment you will
use and the results you need to obtain.
MAGNET Field provides configurations for the following Optical
survey types:
• Conventional - standard survey with a total station and reflectors.
• Reflectorless - survey in which a reflector is not used.
• Robotic - survey can be performed by one person with a
motorized instrument.
• Level - levelling with a digital level.

Instrument
To set an instrument for the survey:
1. Select the Manufacturer of total stations or levels. MAGNET
Field supports Topcon and Sokkia, and also Gowin for total
stations.
To simulate a real survey, select Manual Mode. In this mode, no
measurements are performed. All the data is entered manually.
2. Select the total station or level Model.

NOTICE NOTICE
The models shown in the list correspond to the chosen
type of survey.

Connection mode
Initial Connection
Depending upon the type of the instrument, the connection mode can
be the following: Cable, Radio, Bluetooth, RC Unit, etc.

3-36 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Optical Survey Configurations

Cable
Cable Comm Settings
The parameters of the cable connection include the following: Baud
(baud rate), Parity, Data (number of the data bits), and Stop (number
of the stop bits).
For a Digital Level, make sure the Output Module is set to RS232.

Survey Parameters
The Survey Parms dialog contains the parameters that will be used by
default during the survey.
Measurement Method
Sets the mode of side-shot measurements. It can be: Sideshot-Direct,
Sideshot Direct/Reverse, and Angle/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev.
Angle Sequence
Sets the sequence of measured angles. Here FS is foresight point (the
next occupation point), BS - backsight point (the previous occupation
point), and Plunge term stands for flipping and rotating the total
station telescope by 180 degrees. These are used for the reduction of
the angle errors. Possible sequences are BS/FS Plunge BS/FS; BS/FS
Plunge FS/BS; FS/BS Plunge BS/FS; FS/BS Plunge FS/BS; BS
Plunge BS/FS Plunge FS; or FS Plunge FS/BS Plunge BS.
Num Sets
The number of measurement sets participating in the average. Here
the Num Sets defaults to 1 and cannot be changed if Sideshot-Direct
or Sideshot Direct/Reverse is selected in the Meas Method field. A
choice of Angle/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev in the Meas Method field allows
for NumSets to be greater than 1.
Tolerances
The admissible deviation values of the horizontal and vertical angles
and the distance.
Auto Accept Meas

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-37


Configuring Jobs

This is for use with the sideshot Meas Method "Angle-Dist Sets-dir/
Rev" and "Sideshot-Direct/Reverse" for motorized surveys. If this
option is checked, when the total station turns to the prism it will
automatically take a measurement, then turn to the next point in the
sequence. If unchecked, once the total station turns to the prism, you
will be prompted to accept the measurement, then turn to the next
point in the sequence.
Auto Advance Set
This is for use with the sideshot Meas Method "Angle-Dist Sets-dir/
Rev" for Robotic and non-RC2 surveys. If checked, when each set is
complete (if more than one set is chosen), the total station will
automatically advance to the next set and continue the operation. If
unchecked, when a set is complete, the user will be prompted to
advance to the next set.
Distance Averaging
It determines if the distance used is measured using one signal or an
average of several signals.
Measure Reverse Distances
Enables the reverse distance measurements. These are used for the
reduction of the distance measurement errors.
Next
Opens the second Survey parameters dialog.

Survey Parameters
Meas Type
Sets the order and the type of the measurements in one set. Here: HA
- horizontal angle; VA - vertical angle; SD - slope distance; HD -
horizontal distance; VD - vertical distance.
EDM mode
Determines the sensitivity to use for the distance measurements -
coarse or fine.
Prism Constant

3-38 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Optical Survey Configurations

The parameter of the prism, characterizing the difference between the


reflection plane and the center of the prism.
Point Guide
Select this check box to operate the tracking lights.
Non-Prism
Set whether to use the prism or non-prism mode
AutoTopo (only for the Robotic survey)
The parameters of the automatic survey.

Stakeout Parameters
The Stakeout Parms dialog enables you to set the parameters that will
be used during a stakeout.
Horiz Dist Toler
Set the horizontal distance tolerance value.
Reference Direction
The Total Station Stakeout uses the location of the instrument as the
Reference Direction.
Turn TS to Design Point
Turns the Instrument to the Design Point based on HA only or HA/
VA, or in the Automatic HA, or Automatic HA/VA modes

Point Properties
Point Increment
Select if the point number is to be incremented when adding a new
point.

Miscellaneous (Optical) Parameters


The Miscellaneous dialog is used to customize the user interface:
Display Coordinates after Measurements: when checked,
computed coordinates are displayed automatically after a TS

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-39


Configuring Jobs

measurement is performed and before the point coordinates are stored


into the database.
Apply Earth Curvature and Refraction: corrects the computed
heights for Earth Curvature (Vertical Distance) and slope distances
and vertical angles for atmospheric refraction.
Prompt for Rod Height: when checked, prompts for a height of the
Rod (Target) before a point is stored.
Prompt for BS Check: when checked, will bring up the Backsight
Check dialog when the Backsight Setup dialog is exited.
Prompt for Codes: when checked, a dialog will appear to specify the
code and attribute before a surveyed point is stored.
Stakeout sound: gives a sound indicator in Stakeout as the point is
staked out.
Manual Stakeout Update (Robotic Only): when checked, the Meas
button in the Stakeout dialogs must be pressed to make a
measurement to the Robotic Total Station. When not checked the
measurements are recorded continuously. This applies to the Stakeout
dialogs only. NOTE: In conventional or reflectorless modes this
option may be checked for the ENT button on controllers to invoke
the MEASURE process; otherwise, the ENT key will MEASURE the
first time in stakeout and then become a SAVE button.
Beep on storing points: beeps each time the point is stored.
VA Zero at Level: VA is set to Zero at Level.
Use Horizontal Angle Left: Horizontal Angles are measured
counter-clockwise.
Automatically display BS Setup dialog: if checked, the Backsight
Setup Dialog will be displayed automatically when you attempt to
access any of the dialogs involving total station observations.
Hold Offset Measurement: if checked, the dialog to measure an
offset point with the help of the selected offset tool displays
automatically after each measurement.
Hold Vertical Offset: available only for the Digital Level. If checked,
this is used to hold the Vertical Offset between measurements.

3-40 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Optical Survey Configurations

BS Is Always Required: if checked, a warning to set Backsight


always displays when attempting to access any of the dialogs
involving total station and level observations.

Search/Track (Topcon)
The Search/Track dialog contains the settings for the total station
signal tracking in the Robotic mode.
Turning Speed
Sets the turn speed of a total station in revolutions per minute.
Start Search After
Sets the delay between the loss of the signal and the start of searching.
Pattern
Sets the program for the tracking and searching.
The Normal (for AP-L1A and GRT-2000) or Pattern 1 (for the rest of
the instruments) mode can be selected to search the prism at the point
where the prism is lost. The Instrument searches in up and down
directions gradually from the point where the prism is lost. The
searching continues until the prism is found. 
The High (for AP-L1A and GRT-2000) or Pattern 2 (for the rest of
the instruments) mode also can be selected to search for the prism. In
this case the search pattern tries to locate the prism in a very short
time. Instrument searches from up to down. The searching continues
until the prism is found or a maximum of six attempts. 
The auto tracking mode changes to manual mode when the prism
cannot be found within six attempts and returns to the point where the
prism was lost.
Trk Speed
Sets the speed for tracking. It can be slow, medium or fast, or, in the
case of GTS800a model - Survey or Machine controlled.
Sensitivity
Sets the power of the accepted signal. It can be low, medium, or high.
Track Light

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-41


Configuring Jobs

Sets if the light on the line of sight should be switched on, off, or the
automatic mode is enabled.
Scan Range
Sets the width of the tracking signal. It can be narrow, middle or wide.
Available only in the AP-L1A total stations.
Range
Sets the range of searching, in degrees, for the vertical and horizontal
planes.

Search/Track (Sokkia)
The Search/Track dialog contains the settings for the total station
signal tracking in the Robotic mode.
Search Area
Sets the area of searching or tracking, in degrees, for the vertical and
horizontal planes.

Monitor Options
Log To
Select from options None, File, or communication ports.
If Log To File or a communication port is chosen, select from the
following:
Output Type
Select whether to output Raw Data or Coordinates.
Output Format
For Raw Data, select whether to output FC-5, FC-6/GTS-7 or GTS-6
format.
For Coordinates, only GGA format is available.
File Name
If Log To File is chosen, enter the name and location of the file to log
into.

3-42 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Coordinate System

Comm Settings
If a serial COM port is selected, enter the baud rate, parity, data and
stop bits settings for the comm port.
Store As Check Point
When selected, the measurements are stored as Check Points to the
original points in the monitor list; otherwise, they are stored as
normal points.

Coordinate System
To specify the Coordinate System for the Job:
1. In Projection select the projection to be used from the drop-

down list. Initially the list is empty. Click to activate


projections necessary for work. More...
2. Select the Use NADCON check box, available for all
projections on NAD27 datum, to make the coordinates in
MAGNET Field equal to the same from Corpscon (Coordinate
Conversion Software).
3. Select the Use Grid/Ground check box to enable transformation

to ground coordinates for surveying. Click to set


transformation parameters. Find out more on Grid to Ground
transformation.
4. In Datum specify the datum as required for the projection
selected. Select the datum from the drop-down list.

NOTICE NOTICE
The NAD83 datum has three independent realizations in
MAGNET Field with respect to the WGS84 datum: NAD83,
NAD83(ITRF96) and NAD83_NO_TRANS. More...

Click to add a custom datum if necessary. More...

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-43


Configuring Jobs

5. Select Geoid from the drop-down list. The job will refer to the
selected geoid file to convert ellipsoidal heights to elevations.

Click to add the geoid to the list. More...

NAD83 Datum Details


The NAD83 datum has three independent realizations in MAGNET
Field with respect to the WGS84 datum: NAD83, NAD83(ITRF96)
and NAD83_NO_TRANS to reflect the updates to these datums. The
original intent was for WGS84 and NAD83 to be identical. The
mathematical definition of the ellipsoids (WGS84 and GRS80) differs
slightly due to the choice of defining constants and number of
significant figures. The maximum discrepancy between a Cartesian
X,Y, Z coordinate projected onto both ellipsoids is 0.1 mm at 45
degrees latitude. So consider the ellipsoids to be identical.
There is some confusion between the WGS84 and NAD83 datums.
When NAD83 was first realized in 1986, it used the same control
stations as WGS84, some of which were Doppler stations, which
were accurate to about one meter. Consider the datums to be identical.
Since this time, there have been several realizations of WGS84, the
latest being WGS84 (G1150), which was performed using data from
IGS tracking stations collected during GPS Week 1150. Recent
studies have shown that WGS84 (G1150) is essentially identical to
the International Terrestrial Reference Frame of 2000 (ITRF00).
Also, during this time there have been no new realizations of NAD83.
What this means is that WGS84 and NAD83 can no longer be
considered identical and are in fact different by more than one meter.
This is because the WGS84 datum has been updated over time, using
GPS while the NAD83 datum has remained constant since 1986.
However, most software manufacturers still consider WGS84 to be
identical with NAD83.
To be compatible with other manufacturers, Topcon provides
transformation parameters from WGS84 to NAD83 where all the
parameters are zero. This means WGS84 equals NAD83. This set of
datum transformation parameters is called NAD83 No_Trans.

3-44 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Coordinate System

Topcon also provides another set of datum transformation parameters


called NAD83 which reflects the updates to WGS84. These
parameters are taken from the National Geodetic Survey. Topcon only
uses the first seven parameters, three translations, three rotations, and
scale.

Projections
The Projections dialog contains a list of cataloged projections divided
by regions, that can be chosen for use in the job.
To add a desired projection to the list in the Coordinate System
dialog:
In the Pre-Defined panel:
1. Click the region node to expand the tree of available
projections, and use the scroll bar to view the full list of
projections.
2. Highlight the name of the desired projection.
3. Use the arrow button to select the chosen projection in the Pre-
Defined panel and insert it into the Active panel.
4. Repeat the steps to add other projections.
5. Create a custom projection to the list of pre-defined ones by
clicking the Custom button. More...
In the Active panel:
1. View all active projections.

2. Use to delete a highlighted projection from the Active


panel if required.

3. Click to add the active projections to the drop-down


list in the Coordinate System dialog.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-45


Configuring Jobs

Grid/Ground Parameters
To set Grid/Ground parameters:
1. In Parameters, select which set of parameters to enter: Scale
factor (more...), Average Job Height (more...), or Origin Point
(more...).
2. In Origin Pt and Scale Factor modes directly enter the
Combined Scale Factor to be used in the transformation. In any
Parameters mode resulting combined scale factor will be
displayed at the bottom of the dialog for reference purposes.
3. In Avg Job Ht mode enter the Map Scale Factor from Ellipsoid
to Grid to be used in the transformation.
4. In Scale Factor mode designate combined scale factor
transformation direction. In Origin Pt and Avg Job Ht modes
this displays used direction.
5. Enter the Average Job Height to be used in the transformation.
6. Enter the angle value of Azimuth Rotation directly if it is
known.

7. Click to calculate the rotation from azimuths on Grid


and Ground. More... Azimuths/Bearings in turn can be
calculated from points in the job. More...
8. In Scale Factor or Average Job Ht modes enter Offsets of the
origin along the North and East axes. These offsets are from
the Geodetic North -> Ground North.
9. In Origin Pt mode select from map, list or enter the coordinates
for the Origin Point.
10. In Origin Pt mode enter the coordinates for the Ground Point.
Find out more... on how to perform Grid/Ground transformation.

Compute Rotation
To calculate Rotation from azimuths on Ground and Grid:
1. You can either manually enter the Grid and Ground Azimuths or
click the Compute button to calculate azimuth using points in
the job that define the needed directions.

3-46 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Coordinate System

2. Click to compute Rotation.

Compute Azimuth/Bearing
To compute the azimuth by two points that define the direction:
1. In From, enter the name of the initial point or select the point

from the map or the list .


2. In To, enter the name of the terminal point or select the point

from the map or the list .


3. Enter an angle to Add to Azimuth if required.
4. View the computed Azimuth.

Custom Projections
This dialog contains a list of custom (user-defined) projections.
• Initially the Projection list is empty. Click the Add button to
create a new custom projection and add it to the list. More...
• Click the Edit button to change a projection that was added to the
list.
• Click the Delete button to delete a highlighted projection from the
list.

Creating a Custom Projection


To create a new custom projection:
1. Enter a Name for the new projection.
2. Select a Type from the list of sample projections.
3. Select a Datum from the displayed list of datums, or click

to create a custom one (more...) and then select it.


4. Enter the Region to which the projection belongs. If no region is
specified, it will be added to the Global list.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-47


Configuring Jobs

5. Enter a description (Note) for the projection.


6. Click Next to enter the new projection specifications depending
on the selected sample projection type. More...

Custom Projection Specifications


Depending on the Type of projection selected, you are prompted to
fill in some of the following fields.
1. Enter the latitude (Lat0) and longitude (Lon0) of a point chosen
as the origin on the central meridian of the custom projection.
2. Enter the false Easting (East0 or E0) and Northing (North0 or
N0) of the origin for the projection. These constant values are
added to all negative Eastings and Northings to get only
positive values of Easting and Northing.
3. Enter the Scale that sets a constant scale factor along the central
meridian of the custom projection.
4. Enter the longitude of Central Meridian for the projection.
5. Enter the North and South latitudes bounding the area of the
custom projection (NorthLat and SouthLat).
6. Enter the azimuth of the axis (AxisAzimuth) for the projection.

7. Click to create the new projection and add it to the


Projection list.

NOTICE NOTICE
The Latitudes are positive for the Northern Hemisphere,
and negative for the Southern Hemisphere. The
Longitudes are positive for Eastern directions and negative
for Western directions relative to the GMT line.

Custom Datums
This dialog contains a list of custom (user-defined) datums.

3-48 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Coordinate System

• Initially the Datum list is empty. Click the Add button to create a
new custom datum and add it to the list. More...
• Click the Edit button to change a datum that was added to the list.
• Click the Delete button to delete a highlighted datum from the
list.

Creating a Custom Datum


To create a new custom datum:
1. Enter a Name for the new datum.
2. Select an Ellipsoid from the displayed list of ellipsoids, or click

to create a custom one (more...) and then select it.


3. Enter a description (Note) for the datum.
4. Click Next to enter transformation parameters to convert from
WGS84 to the new datum. More...

Custom Datum Specifications


MAGNET Field uses the seven-parameters Helmert Transformation
Strict Formula for datum transformation.
To create a custom datum:
1. In Offsets, enter the Datum to Space (WGS84) offsets: dX, dY,
dZ.
2. In Rotations, enter the Datum to Space (WGS84) rotations: rX,
rY, rZ, in seconds.
3. Enter the Scale in ppm.

4. Click to create the new datum and add it to the Datum


list.

Custom Ellipsoids
This dialog contains a list of custom (user-defined) ellipsoids.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-49


Configuring Jobs

• Initially the Ellipsoid list is empty. Click the Add button to create
a new custom ellipsoid and add it to the list. More...
• Click the Edit button to change an ellipsoid that was added to the
list.
• Click the Delete button to delete a highlighted ellipsoid from the
list.

Creating a Custom Ellipsoid


To create a custom ellipsoid:
1. Enter a Name for the ellipsoid.
2. Change the values of ellipsoid semi-major equatorial axis (A)
and inverse flattening (1/F) as required.
3. Note: By default, the A and 1/F fields contains the values for
the most common reference ellipsoid defined by WGS84.
4. In Note, enter a description for the ellipsoid.

5. Click to create the new ellipsoid and add it to the list of


all the available Ellipsoids.

Geoids
Geoid is the physical reference surface of the Earth. Its shape reflects
the distribution of mass inside the Earth. Geoid undulations are
important for converting GPS-derived ellipsoidal height differences to
orthometric height differences (elevations). 
The Geoids List dialog contains a list of Geoids available for
selection: the Name and Full Path.
• Initially the Geoid List is empty. Click the Add button to add a
new geoid to the list. More...

NOTICE NOTICE
Install the geoid file on the disk prior to adding it to the list.
Some geoid files can be installed into the Geoids folder

3-50 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Global Settings

during MAGNET Field installation. They are provided with


the installation program as Geoid File Format (.gff) files.
• Click the Edit button to change a geoid that was added to the list.
• Click the Remove button to delete a highlighted geoid from the
list.

Adding a Geoid
In the Add/Edit Geoid dialog, select a Geoid file from the disk and
see the boundaries for the geoid. After being selected, the geoid file
appears in the Geoids List dialog.
To add a geoid to the geoids list:
1. Select the Geoid Format of the geoid file to load.
2. Click Browse to navigate to the desired file on the disk, and
select it.

• After the geoid is selected, displays the path to the file.


• You can see the boundary of the geoid application: the longitudes
and latitudes of the north-west and south-east corners of the geoid
boundary.

3. Click to add the selected geoid to the list of all the


available Geoids in the jobs.

Global Settings
Sets general settings in MAGNET Field to use with the currently
selected job.
In the Global tab:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-51


Configuring Jobs

1. Select the Use Bold Font check box to display the text in bold
typeface.
2. Select the Enable Job History check box to enter and save the
surveyor’s operation on the job in the file.
3. Button Sound is the default to provide sound effects when you
click any functional button.
4. Prompt for Connection is the default to display the Connections
dialog on opening a job. Clear the box to automatically connect
with the device.
On the New Jobs tab, set parameters to automatically import:
1. Localization from previous job:
• Select Never import to create new jobs without previous
localization.
• Select Always import to automatically export localization from
the last open job to a new job upon opening the new job.
• Select Prompt to import to choose if you want to use localization
from the last open job.
2. Global code library to job:
• Select Never import to create new jobs without automatic import
of global codes.
• Select Always import to automatically import.
• Select Prompt to import to choose whether to import or not.

Job Backup Settings


Backup copies are automatically created for the current job and safely
stored with new names "<job file_name>!YYY-MM-DD!. mjf.bak"
in the Target folder. You are able to open the backup of the job file in
the usual way. More...
To configure backup settings:

3-52 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Configuring Menus

1. Click Permanent to change the Target folder. Type the new

folder name in the backup path or select it by clicking .


2. Select the Frequency in which you want the backup to occur.
Ten minutes is the default. If you select None, backups will not
be created.
3. In History Depth, change the number of backups to keep if
required. Three files is the default.

NOTICE NOTICE
MAGNET Field will create a separate *.bak file for the
current job every time you open the job file during the day
with another date. If the job file is opened in subsequent
days, the *.bak files previously formed will be overwritten to
the ones with the newer dates.

4. Click to save the settings and return to the Home


menu.

Configuring Menus
This allows you to change the view of the Home screen and the view
and contents of the folders within it. Click the Lock Menu button to
freeze menus for editing.
To edit the Home screen (in the left/top panel):
1. Highlight the name of the desired icon.

2. Use the and buttons to move the name up and


down in the list to change the order of icons in the Home
screen.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-53


Configuring Jobs

3. Click to store the changes and open the modified


Home screen.
To edit the folder (in the right/lower panel):
1. Highlight the name of the desired Home icon in the left panel.
The right panel will show the contents of the corresponding
folder. By default MAGNET Field displays full contents of all
the folders.
2. If you want to erase a seldom or never used icon in this folder,
clear the box near the desired name. Select the box again to
restore the icon in the folder.

3. Use and buttons to move the name up and


down in the list to change the order of icons in the folder.

4. Click to store the changes and return to the Home


screen.

Codes Settings
To configure global settings for codes:
1. In Default New Type, set the default type for a new code. If set
to Prompt, you will be prompted to define the new code when
storing points.
2. In Data Entry, set the preferred entry mode between Notes and
Codes for Survey dialogs.
3. In Code File, use the Browse button to select the Global Code
file to be used along with the codes in the job.

3-54 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Configuring Stake Reports

NOTICE NOTICE
The default code file (TopSURVDefCodeLib.xml) is
installed automatically in the tpsdata folder upon MAGNET
Field installation.

4. The global setting Code with Description toggles the display of


descriptions with Codes.
5. Selecting Alow Custom allows you to custom define the control
codes and enables you to set them Persistent for Survey dialogs.
6. In the Code Prompts tab, select the appropriate boxes in order
to be prompted for setting codes in Survey, COGO, and Stake
dialogs.

Configuring Stake Reports


Contains a list of default configurations of stakeout reports and their
types.
To edit the list of report configurations:
1. Highlight a name of the report configuration to control.
2. Click the Delete button to remove the report configuration from
the list.
3. Click the Edit button to change the highlighted report
configuration. More...
4. Click the Add button to create a new configuration. More...

Report Configuration
You can edit:
1. The Name of the report configuration. To do this, click in the
field.
2. The Type of the report configuration. Select a type from the
drop-down list.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 3-55


Configuring Jobs

3. Select the corresponding items in the list to include


corresponding information in the report. Use the scroll bar to
view the entire list. By default all items are included.

4. Use the and arrow buttons to change the order


of displayed information in the report.
5. Click the Edit button or just click the item to open a field to edit

the item Name as required. You can use Calculator to


make some calculations if required.

Enterprise Configure
To configure settings for connection to the Magnet Enterprise web-
server:
1. In Login, enter the user name of your account.
2. In Password, enter the secret word of your account.
3. Select Login on startup to login upon starting the program.

3-56 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 4

Exchanging Data
Click the Exchange icon on the Home screen to exchange data.
Click an icon to perform the task:

To Job
Exports data from the current job to another job.

To File
Exports data from the current job to a file.

To 3DMC
Exports data from the current job to a 3DMC project.

Enterprise Upload 
Uploads job data to MAGNET Enterprise.

From Job
Imports data to the current job from another job.

From File
Imports data from a file to the current job.

From 3DMC
Imports data from a 3DMC project.

Enterprise Download
Downloads data from Magnet Enterprise.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-1


Exchanging Data

Export To Job
To export data from the current job to another job:
1. Select an existing job or create a new one to which you will
export data. More...
2. Define the general types of data to be exported. More...
3. Select what specific data of the defined types will be exported.
More...
4. Filter points for export if required. More...
5. View the export progress. More...

Select Job
To select a Job to open:
1. Highlight the job in the job list. The job list contains the Job
Names of all existing jobs created/opened using this software.
2. When a job is selected in this list, the Created: and Modified:
fields will reflect when the job was created and last modified.

3. indicates the path to the selected job. By default, the


job files are stored in the [program]\Jobs folder.
4. If you do not see the desired job name in the list, click Browse.
It takes you to the Browse dialog to browse directories to search
for the job.
5. You can export data to a new job. Click New to create a new job.

Export Data To Job


To select data to be exported from the current job to another job:
1. From the Points drop-down list, select the filter for points to
export:
• All Points
• By Point List(s)

4-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Export To Job

• By Type(s)
• By Range and Code(s)
• By Type(s), Range and Code(s)
• or None
2. Select the corresponding check boxes to select data types,
which should be exported. The data that was absent in the
current job will be unavailable for selection. More...
3. Click Settings if required to setup the export of points as
control. By default, they are exported as design.
4. Click Next to filter the points if required, then choose the
needed objects from a list of objects of the selected data type.

Filter Points By Range and Code(s)


To select for exchange points by a range and code(s):
1. Select the Filter by Codes check box to make the field active.
Enter the desired codes or click Select and choose the codes
from a dialog which appears. Select Codes For Filter
2. Select the Filter by Range check box, to make the field active.
Specify the names of the points to be included. These can be
specified by a range or by enumeration individually. The
symbols ';', '.' or ',' can be used for Name Separator and '-' for
Range Separator.

NOTICE NOTICE
If available, click Next to continue selecting data. 
The Next button is available until all data of the chosen
types is selected. After the Next button becomes greyed

out, the button appears to start the export process.

Select Objects to Export


The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for
export.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-3


Exchanging Data

1. When filtering points by types, the existing types of points will


be available for selection.
2. The objects in this dialog are those available in the current job.
3. Choose the needed objects from a list of objects:
• Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list next
to the desired codes.
• Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on
and off, respectively.
• Click Select All to choose all the items at one time.

NOTICE NOTICE
If the Next button is available, click it to continue selecting
data. 
The Next button is available until all data of the chosen
types is selected. After the Next button becomes greyed

out, the button appears to start the export process.

Select Codes For Filter


All the codes existing in the current job will be listed in the Code(s)
list.
Select the code(s) for which you want to exchange all the points
having that code:
• Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list next to
the desired codes.
• Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on and
off, respectively.
• Click Select All to choose all the items at one time.

4-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Import from Job

Export Status
The export process is reflected in the Export Status dialog that
contains a progress bar and comments about the export process. The
progress bar displays the percentage of the points being exported.
Export Warnings
display the warning messages during the Export process if necessary.

Import from Job


To import data from another job to the current job:
1. Select the job from which you will import data. More...
2. Define the general types of data to be imported. More...
3. Filter points for import if required. More...
4. Select what specific data of the defined types will be imported.
More...
5. View the import progress. More...

Import Data from Job


The title of this dialog contains the name of the job selected. The
dialog enables you to select the data to import and, if necessary, filter
the imported points:
1. From the Points drop-down list, select the filter for points to
import:
• All Points
• By Point List(s)
• By Type(s)
• By Range and Code(s)
• By Type(s), Range and Code(s)
• or None

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-5


Exchanging Data

2. Select the corresponding check boxes to select data types which


should be imported. The data that was absent in the current job
will be unavailable for selection. More...
3. Click Settings if required to setup the import of points as
control. By default, they are imported as design.
4. Click Next to filter the points if required, then choose the
needed objects from a list of objects of the selected data type.

Select Objects to Import


The title of this dialog changes based on the data type selected for
import.
1. When filtering points by types, the existing types of points will
be available for selection.
2. The objects in this dialog are those available in the current job.
3. Choose the needed objects from a list of objects:
• Selection can be done by placing check marks in the list next
to the desired codes.
• Click Check and Uncheck to toggle the highlighted item(s) on
and off, respectively.
• Click Select All to choose all the items at one time.

NOTICE NOTICE
If the Next button is available, click it to continue selecting
data. 
The Next button is available until all data of the chosen
types is selected. After the Next button becomes greyed

out, the button appears to start the import process.

Filter Points By Range and Code(s)


To exchange points by a range and code(s):

4-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Export To File

1. Select the Filter by Codes check box to make the field active.
Enter the desired codes, or click Check and choose the codes
from a dialog which appears. Select Codes For Filter
2. Select the Filter by Range check box, to make the field active.
Specify the names of the points to be included. These can be
specified by a range or by enumeration individually. The
symbols ';', '.' or ',' can be used for Name Separator and '-' for
Range Separator.

NOTICE NOTICE
If the Next button is available, click it to continue selecting
data. The Next button is available until all data of the
chosen types is selected. After the Next button becomes

greyed out, the button appears to start the import


process.

Import Status
The import process is reflected in the Import Status dialog that
contains a progress bar and comments about the import process. The
progress bar displays the percentage of the points being imported.
Import Warnings display the warning messages during the Im-
port process if necessary.

Export To File
To export data from the current job to a file:
1. Select the data type and the file format to which you will export
data as required. More...
2. Set the code style if needed. More...
3. If required, select file units for data to be exported. More...
4. If required, select the points types to export. More...

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-7


Exchanging Data

5. Filter points for export if required. More...


6. Set a name and destination directory for the file.
7. Set the coordinate system and coordinate type for exported
points.
8. Define settings for custom text formats. More...
9. View the export progress. More...

Export Data To File


The To File dialog is used to export different data types to files with
either predefined or custom formats.
Data
Select the data type to export to the file: Points, Lines, Point Lists,
Code Library, Raw Data, Horizontal Alignments, Vertical
Alignments, X-Section Sets, Roads, X-Section Templates,
Localization, Scanning Data, Roads Survey, Job History, Surfaces
(TINs), Layers or Multiple Types.
Format
Select the file type for export that corresponds to the data type you
selected.
Select file units
Check this field to set units for values in the file. More...
Select types of the points
Check this field if not all types of points should be exported (only for
Points data type).
Use filters
Check this field if filters (by code and by range) should be used for
exported points (only for Points data type).
ASCII file properties
Define the conditions of the exported file interpretation. These
conditions are the use of the same type for the attributes and the use of
quotes for the text values. The ASCII FIle Properties field appears
only when points are being exported to a file of text type.

4-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Export To File

Setup DXF/DWG Settings For Export

Code Style Setup


This dialog allows you to setup a code style for the Custom Text, TDS
RAW and MC project (tp3) formats.
List of code styles
You can add/delete any code style. All saved code styles are available
in the list. Initially four predefined styles are available: Topcon,
Carlson, GeoPAK, and Eagle Point.
Available fields for code style
You can combine any available fields to the one code style.
Using arrows, move the necessary items from the Available column to
the right part the Order column in the desired order.
Code Style Separators
Control Codes

Code Style Separators


This dialog lists the current separators for the selected code style.
Code Separator
Enter the separator to delimit the multiple codes.
String Separator
Enter the separator to delimit the code string.
Control Code Separator
Enter the separator to delimit the control code.
Note Separator
Enter the separator to delimit the note.

Control Codes
This dialog lists the control codes which can be replaced by user-
defined values during an export routine. The changes are applied only
for the selected style. The current MAGNET Field control code value

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-9


Exchanging Data

(if it exists) is placed in the brackets after the name of the


corresponding control code.
Arc Start (AS): Value of the Arc Start control code.
Arc End (AE): Value of the Arc End control code.
Rectangle (R): Value of the Rectangle control code.
Close (C): Value of the Close control code.
Line Start: Value of the Line Start control code.
Line End: Value of the Line End.

File Units
This dialog allows you to select units for the data being exchanged.
This option is available for all data types and formats containing
distance/angular values. Depending on the data and format selected,
you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if available.

Select Data For Export To File


This dialog lists the available data to export depending on the selected
format.
Possible data types
Points, Lines, Codes, Surfaces, Alignments, X-sections (templates),
TS Raw Data and GPS Raw Data.
Selection
Check the control after the appropriate data type to export. The
control next to this selection lists the number of the corresponding
elements in the job.

Select Filters For Points


This dialog is used to select the points filters for the file export.
Points
Select the filter for the points to export from the drop-down menu: All
Points, By Type, By Range and Code, By Type, Range and Code,
None.

4-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Export To File

Settings For Text Custom Formats


The Text File Format dialog allows you to select the format for the
Text File.
Delimiter
Select the separator symbol between the data in the import file. It can
be a space, comma, tab, or other (select from the list).
Select File Format
Selects the order of the fields in the imported file.
Add Format
Allows you to create a new file format with the help of the Custom
Style dialog.
Edit Format
Allows you to change an existing file format with the help of the
Custom Style dialog.
Select Fields For Custom Formats

Select Fields For Custom Formats


Using arrows, move the necessary items from the left part of the
dialog (the Available column) to the right part (the Order column) in
the desired order.
Save
Saves the File Style and returns to the Text File Format dialog. A new
string appears in the Select File format drop-down menu.

Latitude/Longitude Record Format


From the Format (Lat/Lon) drop-down menu in the Lat/Lon Record
Format dialog, select the desired format to represent data being
imported from/exported to the file.

Setup DXF/DWG Settings For Export


You can select the styles of the point/lines for output.
Point Style

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-11


Exchanging Data

Choose one from the available styles:


• AutoCAD Points: only point coordinates.
• AutoCAD Points with Text Fields: point coordinates with text
fields for point name, elevation, codes, and attributes.
• Civil 3D/Land Desktop Point Objects: Civil 3D points will be
used.
• Carlson Point Blocks: Carlson point blocks will be used.
• TopSURV Point Blocks: the default TopSURV style will be used.
It includes point name, elevation, codes, strings, and attributes.
Line Style
• AutoCAD Lines: only line coordinates.
• AutoCAD Lines with Text Fields: line coordinates with text fields
for line name, elevations, codes, and attributes.
• TopSURV Line Blocks: the default TopSURV style will be used. It
includes the line name, elevations, codes, strings, and attributes.
Use 3D coordinates
Check this button to export elevations with plain coordinates as well.
Use text font height
By default, it is auto. Check mark this box to open a field to manually/
automatically set the height of text fonts to show the text (in CAD
units).

Import From File


To import data from a file to the current job:
1. Select the data type and the file format from which you will
import data as required. More...
2. Select settings for importing points. More...
3. If required, select file units for imported data. More...
4. Select the file from which data will be imported.
5. Define settings for custom text formats. More...

4-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Import From File

6. Set up the coordinate system and coordinate type for imported


data.
7. View the import status. More...

Import Data From File


The From File dialog is used to import different data types from files
with either predefined or custom formats.
Data
Select the data type to import from the file: Points, Lines, Point Lists,
Code Library, Horizontal Alignments, Vertical Alignments, X-
Section Sets, Roads, X-Section Templates, Localization, Scanning
Data, Surfaces (TINs), Layers or Multiple Types.
Format
Select the corresponding type of the file being imported for the data
type you selected.
Select file units
This option is available for all data types and formats containing
distance/angular values. When this checkbox is selected, the Next
button opens the File Units screen that allows you to select units for
imported data. Depending on the data and format selected, you can
set only distance, or distance and angle units if available.
Settings
Set the type of the imported points. More...
Settings For Text Custom Formats
Import of Multiple Data Types

Setup Settings For Import


Set the type of the imported points:
Import Points As (only for Points, Point Lists and Multiple data
types)
Select the type of the points you import:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-13


Exchanging Data

• Control Points: the points with coordinates, known from the


catalog. These are used for localization.
• Design Points: points used as targets for staking.
There are several options to customize the import process from a
DXF/DWG file.
Import block base points
Select this check box to import block base coordinates as points.
Load as background image
Select this check box to import data from the file as a background
image. If the box is unchecked, all data from the file will be stored as
a set of the points/lines within a job. This will not happen if you
choose to import the point lists.

Import of Multiple Data Types


After loading data from the file you can select the data types you want
to import.

List of Imported Objects


This dialog shows the list with the objects loaded from the file. Check
the control before the appropriate object to import.

Export To 3DMC
The To MC Project dialog starts the procedure of export of different
data types from a 3DMC project to the current MAGNET job.
Data
The multiple type of data is available for export.
Format
Sets the *. tp3 type of the MC project file.
Select file units

4-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Import From 3DMC

When this check box is selected, the Next button opens the File Units
screen that allows you to select units for the data exported. Depending
on the data and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance
and angle units if available.
Export areas as lines
Select this check box to export area data from the current job or line
data to the MC project.
Code Style
Opens the Code Style dialog to set a format for point properties
(codes, control codes, strings and notes) to export to the file.
Alphanumeric points will be renumbered starting at:
Displays a number at which MAGNET Field will start renaming
points with alphanumeric names as the TDS format demands points
that have only numerical names. MAGNET Field will continue
numbering from the last previous number of the job point.

Import From 3DMC


The From MC Project dialog starts the procedure of importation of
different data types from a 3DMC project to the current MAGNET
job.
Data
Multiple types of data are available for import.
Format
Shows only the *. tp3 type of the MC project file.
Select file units
When this check box is selected, the File Units screen displays to
allow you to select units for the data imported. Depending on the data
and format selected, you can set only distance, or distance and angle
units if available.
Settings
Sets the type of the imported points:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-15


Exchanging Data

• Control Points: the points with coordinates, known from the


catalog. These are used for localization.
• Design Points: points used as targets for stakeout.

Enterprise Upload
To upload data from the current job to an enterprise project:
1. Select a Project from a list of available projects. After you
select the project, the names and types of the in-boxes appear in
the field. Check mark the desired in-box.
2. Click Add to upload a file. The name and path to the file will be
displayed in the corresponding field.
3. If required, click Clear All to erase selections.
4. Click Upload to start uploading data to the selected in-box.
Upload status will show the upload progress and the result.

Enterprise Download
To download uploaded data from an enterprise project to your device:
1. Select a Project from a list of available projects. After you
select the project, the names and types of available in-boxes
appear.
2. Select the in-box that contains the needed files. The names of
the uploaded files and the dates they were uploaded appear.
Select the file(s) to be downloaded.
3. If required, click Refresh to renew the content of the selected
in-box.
4. Click Download to start downloading data to your device.
Download status will show the download progress and the
result.

4-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Duplicate Objects

Duplicate Objects
The dialog is being shown when an object with the same name as the
imported one already exists in the job. Depending on the object type,
the following options are available:
Overwrite?
The object in the database will be overwritten with the imported one.
Rename?
The imported object will be renamed.
Prefix?
The entered prefix will be added to the imported object name.
Suffix?
The entered suffix will be added to the imported object name.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 4-17


Exchanging Data

Notes:

4-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 5

Chatting

Click the icon for text messaging.


The Chat dialog contains two tabs:
The Contacts tab displays a list of the names of all MAGNET
Enterprise users who are currently assigned to a chat.
1. To make the list show only the users with online presence
status, check the Only Online box. You will see the users who
are ready for immediate connection.
2. To make the list show last recipients of your messages, select
the Recent Contacts check box that appears if there have been
any contacts.
3. To start chatting:
• Select the user you want to chat with by checking the box
near the name.
• Click the Start Chat button to initiate conversation.
• Type in the message you want to post to the selected user.
The Active Chats tab displays a list of the users with whom you have
already started chatting.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 5-1


Chatting

Notes:

5-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 6

Editing Job Data

Click the icon to open the Edit folder.


Click an icon to perform the task:

Points
Edits properties of existing points and adds new points
manually.

Codes
Edits code properties and adds new codes.

Layers
Edits layer properties and adds new layers manually.

Linework
Edits the linework properties and creates new lineworks
manually.

Areas
Edits areas.

Point Lists
Edits point lists.

Raw Data
Edits raw data and recomputes coordinates.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-1


Editing Job Data

Images
Deletes/adds background images.

Sessions
Edits observation sessions for GNSS receivers.

Stake Reports
Edits stake reports.

Roads
Opens a sub-folder with six options to edit the road
properties and design new roads.

Edit Points
The Points dialog contains the list of the stored points with their
coordinates and codes.
Find by Point
Select an option from the drop-down list to find a point: By Range,
By Code, By Code String, By Radius, By Name or By Layer.
Find Next
Finds the next point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the
previous Find.
Delete
Deletes the point from the list.
Edit
Opens a dialog to edit the selected point's parameters like name, code,
coordinates, etc.
Add
Displays a dialog to create a new point.
Settings

6-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Edit Points

Opens the Display Configuration dialog.

Point Info
This page contains information about the point to be added/edited.
You can edit this information:
1. Name of the point.
2. Code and attribute information for the point.
• You can select a code from the drop-down list. The code
needs to be defined at the time it is entered if it is not a code
that exists in the Codes dialog
• If the code type is Line or Area, an icon will display that the
point belongs to a line. Set a string and, if required, a control
code. More...
• Press the Code button to view information on the code. You
can set two control codes and attribute values for the code.
More...
3. The display of coordinates depends on the selected coordinate
system.
4. If required, select the Control Point check box to use the point
as a control point for localization.

Linework Package
Additional manipulations of linework can be performed using control
codes for the points with the same code-string combination. Up to
two control codes can be specified for every code associated with a
point to store the points. These will be connected to form open or
closed polylines. Select the codes of the Line type to use for such
points.
The supported control codes of AS, AE, C, and R control line
behavior:
1. The AS and AE control codes indicate the start and the end of
an arc, respectively. Arc parameters are determined by the
presence of additional points in the line. These points can create

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-3


Editing Job Data

the line segment with the arc start/or end point which will act as
the tangent to the arc.

NOTICE NOTICE
If only one point is between the arc start and end points,
the arc is formed so that all three points lie on the arc. If
there are two, or more than two points, between the points
with the AS and AE control codes, the points are all
connected by straight line segments.

2. The R control code is applied to the third point of a three-point


polyline and results in the automatic creation of a fourth point
of a parallelogram whose diagonal is specified by the first and
the third point.
3. When the C control code is applied to a point, it connects it to
the starting point of the line, thus closing the line.

NOTICE NOTICE
MAGNET Field will not use this linework package if the
Allow Custom Control Code box on the Global screen is
checked. In this case, you can enter any string to mark it
as a control code. MAGNET Field will not interpret these
control codes.

Code - Attributes
The Code Attributes tab allows you to select a code and its associated
string, attributes, and control code.
Code
Shows the selected code. A code can be selected from the drop-down
list.
Ctrl Code
The control code list shows all the control codes used. The Control
Code is a special type of code that can be used by some graphic tools
for the interpretation of the survey results.

6-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Edit Points

NOTICE NOTICE
A second control code can be added to the code by
turning on the option for a second control code in the top
left menu item.

String
Enter a string for the code.

NOTICE NOTICE
A string can be added to the code by turning on the option
for strings in the top left menu item.

Attributes List
The list shows the available attributes for the code and allows you to
enter/select its value.
Attrib Range
Opens the Attribute Ranges dialog, which displays the valid ranges
for the attributes for the selected code.
Multiple Codes
To add multiple codes, click on this button. More...

Multi-Code
Displays a list of all codes, strings, and attributes for the point being
edited.
Add
Add a code to the list. More...
Edit
Edit the selected code in the list. More...
Delete
Delete a code from the list.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-5


Editing Job Data

Point Check
If a point exists and you try to save another point with the same name,
a dialog displays a prompt that the point already exists.
1. Displays the offsets of the point you are trying to save from the
point that is saved.
2. This dialog enables you to:
• Overwrite on the existing point
• Rename the point to store as another point
• or Store as check point to the existing point
3. If you select to store the point as a check point, you can enable
using it in weighted averaging positions. To do this, check Use
in weighted average. More...
4. In RTK surveys, if checked, the Correct base option allows you
to set up the Base at unknown position. In this case, you can
correct the base position if an observed Topo point has known
coordinates stored in the job and has the same name as the base.
The known coordinates of the observed point are not replaced
with the observed coordinates and are used to correct the Base
coordinates. 
After either closing the Topo dialog or moving to another tab,
recomputations are performed and the coordinates of all points
are updated using the new Base coordinates. 
Note: For Correct Base to work properly, the coordinate type
selected in Display must be the same as the known coordinates
of the observed Topo point.

Layer/Style
Layer
Select the Layer in which to have the Point. Click the "..." to Edit
Layers.
Point Style
Select the point type and color to be used with the point.

6-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Edit Points

WA
List control displays a list of stations that can be used in the Weighted
Average for the point. Also displayed are the E, N, U residuals, WA
Control (whether its used or not), and notes.
Use in WA/Exclude from WA
Select a point in the List control. When you click on this button, the
appropriate action will be taken - the point is added for the WA or
excluded from the WA.

Photo Note
This displays a photo note attached to the point.
To edit the photo note:
5. Use the << and >> buttons to scroll through the photos attached
to the point.
6. Click Add to attach an image to the note. 
Note: If the controller supports the camera, there will be two
options available. Click either Browse to select a photo from
existing ones or Capture to capture an image using the
controller.
7. Click Edit to delete the currently selected photo and attach a
different one instead. 
Note: If the controller supports the camera, there will be two
options available. Click either Browse to select a photo from
existing ones or Capture to capture an image using the
controller.
8. Click Delete to remove the photo note currently displayed for
the point.
The pop-up menu in the top left corner of the screen contains three
additional options for a photo note. More...

Photo Note Pop up menu


• If required, click Show Coordinates to display the coordinate
system and the coordinates of this point over the photos.
Note: If you select Show Coordinates and the WGS84 location of

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-7


Editing Job Data

the point is available, the coordinates will be displayed in


DDMMSSSS format; otherwise, no coordinates will be displayed
or saved in the image.
• If required, click Show Direction to display compass readings
taken at the time you take the photo note. This option is enabled
for the device that supports the camera and the compass. 
Note: The direction is displayed over the photos provided the
compass has been calibrated.
• When you first open the Photo Note tab and select the Show
Direction option, the Compass Calibration dialog will prompt
you to calibrate the compass before taking a photo (if not already
calibrated). The Compass Calibration dialog appears
automatically only once. If you skip the calibration, you will not
be prompted again as long as you edit the point. You will be able
to calibrate the compass any time by clicking the Calibrate
Compass option enabled in the pop-up menu.

NOTICE NOTICE
When you first open the job, the Show Coordinates and
Show Direction options are unchecked. After you select
one or both options for one photo, the application will keep
the selections. The selections will be lost when the device
is shut down. Also, you can turn on or off Show
Coordinates and Show Direction from the Settings dialog in
the Image Capture dialog.

Compass Calibration
The Compass Calibration dialog allows you to process the compass
calibration. The application provides a graphic image describing
calibration movement.
• If you do not want to process the calibration, click the Skip button
to ignore the compass calibration, and no direction will be
provided even if the Show Direction is selected. 
Note: If you skip the calibration, you will not be prompted again
as long as you edit the point. You can calibrate the compass any

6-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Edit Points

time by clicking the Calibrate Compass option enabled in the


pop-up menu.
• Click the Start button to start calibration. The calibration time
depends on the device used. For example, it is 10 seconds for the
FC-236 and 60 seconds for the GRS-1 device.

Image Capture
The Image Capture dialog allows you to take a photo note for the
point.
You can turn on or turn off Show Coordinates and Show Direction
from the Settings dialog that displays by clicking the Settings button
in the top right corner of the dialog. More...

PTL
This page is displayed when the point is a PTL point or when the PTL
mode is selected when adding a point.
From Point, To Point
Defines the Line for the PTL offsets. These points can be selected
from the job by clicking on List.
PTL Offsets
Line defines the distance along the line from the From Point.
Offset defines the distance in a direction perpendicular to the line.
Height is the height difference between the From Point and the
current point.

Point Check
If a point exists and we try to save another point with the same name,
this dialog appears.
Offsets
Displays the offsets of the point we are trying to save from the point
that is saved.
Asks you if you want to:
• Overwrite the existing point

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-9


Editing Job Data

• Rename the point to store as another point


• Save it as a Check Point to the existing point

Find by Point
The Find by Point dialog contains a form for searching a point by its
name.
Name
The name or part of the name of a point.
Match entire name
Set if the whole name was entered in the Point Name field.
Match partial name
Set if a part of the searched name was entered in the Point Name field.
Search
Starts the search process and returns to the Points dialog, highlighting
the point if it is found.

Find by Code
The Find by Code dialog contains a form for searching a point by its
code.
Code
Select the code from the list which is to be searched.
Search
Starts the search process and returns to the Points dialog, highlighting
the point if it is found.

Check Points
This page is present if the point has any check points associated with
it.
The list displays the Name of the check point, the dE, dN, and dH
vector of the check point from the recorded point, the Coordinates of
the check point and any Notes associated with the check point.

6-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Code - Attributes

Cut Sheet
This page is present if this point has been staked out and the stakeout
point stored.
The list displays the Name of the check point, the dE, dN, and dH
vector of the staked out point from the recorded point, the
Coordinates of the staked out point and any Notes associated with the
staked out point.

Code - Attributes
Contains a list of codes used for the survey, the list of attributes for
each code, and a set of tools for editing.
Codes
List of codes in the Job.
Attributes
Lists the attributes of the selected code.
Add
Opens the blank Code or the Attribute dialog (depending upon the list
below which the button is located). A new attribute can be added only
if at least one code exists and it is highlighted.
Edit
Opens the Code or the Attribute dialog (depending upon the list
below which the button is located) with the properties of the
highlighted entry.
Delete
Deletes the highlighted entry.

Code
To create a new code or edit an existing code, enter the code details:
1. The Name of the code.
2. The Description for the code.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-11


Editing Job Data

3. The Type of the objects that the code describes: Point, Line or
Area. Each type has an associated plotting style(s) that can be
edited.
• Point: Set a symbol and attributes for points and color.
• Line: Set a symbol for nodes, style and thickness for lines,
and color.
• Area: Set a symbol for nodes, style and thickness for the
boundary, filling style and transparency for the area, and
color.
• Attribute: Select the radio buttons on this tab to enter the code
at the beginning of a line/area (Start) or at every node point
along the line/area (Each Node).
• DTM: Select the corresponding check box on this tab to use
the code in DTM, as a Breakline or/and an Exclusion Area.
4. Determine a Layer for the code if required.

Attributes
1. The Name of the attribute.
2. The Type of the attribute. Text, Bool, Date-Time, Integer, Menu
or Real Number. Each type has associated settings that can be
edited.
• Text: Select this if the attribute value is an alphanumeric
string. Set the maximum number of characters you can enter.
• Bool: Select a boolean value.
• Date-Time: Use the default (current date) and time for the
code attribute, or set the date and time from the drop-down
list.
• Integer: Select this if the attribute value is an integer. Set the
minimum and the maximum values of the attribute.
• Menu: Select this to assign a list of values to select for the
attribute. The values are entered in the field and added to the
list with the Add button.

6-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Linework

• Real Number: Select this if the attribute value is a real


number. Set the minimum and maximum values of the
attribute.
3. The Default value for the code attribute. Select the Required
check box to be prompted to enter the attribute value every time
when using the corresponding code. If the box is not selected,
the default value will always be used for the code attribute
automatically.

Multiple Code Strings


If it is necessary to add several strings to an object, you can use the
Multiple Codes tool.
The dialog contains a table of Codes and Attributes.
To add a code string to the table, insert the name of the code in the
Code field or choose it from the code list and set the attributes. Then
type the string in the "&" field, and press the Add button. The new
entry appears in the table.

Control Code
The Control Code is a special type of code that can be used by the
graphic tool for the interpretation of the survey results. It can be any
string.
Control Code
The control code list. It shows all the used control codes and also
allows you to enter a new control code.

Linework
The Linework dialog contains a list of existing Lineworks on the left
side of the dialog. The two windows on the right side represent the
general view of the selected linework in the horizontal and vertical
planes. To view the current selected linework in a larger map, double-
click one of the map plots. 
Note: The option to double-click on the map and property buttons is
disabled if accessing this dialog from the Alignment Pair dialog.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-13


Editing Job Data

Edit
Opens the Edit Line dialog. Press to edit the properties of the selected
Line.
Delete
Press to delete the selected Line from the list.
Add
Add a Linework with this button.

Edit Area
Contains a list of existing areas on the left side of the screen, and the
two windows on the right side that represent the view of the selected
area in the horizontal and vertical planes.
Delete
Remove the highlighted Area from the list.
Edit
Edit the Area selected in the list.
Add
Create a new area.

Points in Area
Displays a list of existing points in the selected Area and the general
view of the area boundary.
Area
The name of the Area.
List of Points
The list of currently selected points. The up and down arrows to the
left of List of Points allow you to move the highlighted point up or
down in the order of the points in the area. The arrows symbol
switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys.

6-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Point Lists

Area view
The area is bound with a closed line. Line nodes (points) have the
same code of area type to form an area boundary. The point
highlighted in the list of points will be marked with a yellow circle.
The X symbol deletes the highlighted point from the area. The
symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle between
the point list and the plot with the point list.
Point Info
Shows the point information of the currently selected single point.
Select Points
Displays five methods of adding points to the beginning of the line:
By Code
Select the codes with which the points are added to the area.
By Code String
Select the codes and strings with which the points are added to the
line.
From Map
Select the points by clicking them on the map; points that are
sequentially clicked are connected with a line to arrange an area.
From List
Select the points from the list of points.
From Line
Select all points from the line.

Point Lists
The List of Point Lists dialog contains a list of existing Point Lists on
the left side of the dialog. The two windows on the right side
represent the general view of the selected list in the horizontal and
vertical planes. To view the currently selected point list in a larger
map, double-click one of the map plots.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-15


Editing Job Data

Add
Opens the Add Point List dialog. Press to create a new List.
Edit
Opens the Edit Point List dialog. Press to edit the properties of the
selected List.
Copy
Press to create a copy of the selected List.
Delete
Press to delete the selected Points List from the list.

Point List
The Point List tab shows the general properties of the Point List.
Point List Name
The name of the Point List.
List of Points
The list of currently selected points. Adding the point to the list can
be performed in two ways.
• Through the map: tap the plot on the right. The large Map dialog
opens. Select the points by tapping them on the map - the two
consequently tapped points will be connected with a line. Press
Close to return to the Add/Edit Point List dialog.
• Through the Select Points button: pressing the button displays the
floating menu of five items: By Range, By Code, By Radius, By
CodeString, From Map, and From List. Select the desired way of
adding points and fill in the suggested form: set the range, check
the codes, set the center point and the radius of the area, select the
points from the map or using the list.
Point Info
Shows the point information of a currently selected single point.
The Up and down arrows to the left of List of points allows you to
move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.

6-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Point Lists

The arrows symbol switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys that
duplicate the arrows on the dialog.
The X symbol deletes the highlighted point from the list.
The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle
between the point list and the plot with the point list.

Select Points By Range


Range of Points
Enter here the range of points you want included in the selected
Points List.

NOTICE NOTICE
The symbols ';', '.' or ',' can be used for Name Separators
and '-' for a Range Separator.

Select Points by Code


Select Points with Codes
Select the codes for which you want to add all the points having that
code.

Select Points by Radius


Point
Select the point either by entering it manually or by selecting it from
the map or list. This will be the center of the circle.
Radius
Enter the Radius (distance) for which around the selected Point you
want Points added to the List.

Select Points by Code Strings


Code
Select the code by selecting it from the combo box.
String
Select the strings you want to use for the codestring combination.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-17


Editing Job Data

Point List Check


If a Points List exists with the same name, you are prompted to
choose to overwrite the existing one or rename the Points List.

Layers
Layer List
List of Layers with Names and Status (whether it is empty or has
objects, and if it is the default layer). The icon to the left of the name
indicates whether it is visible or not.
Up/Down Arrows
Move the selected Layer up or down in the order.
Add
Add a new Layer.
Ins
Insert a new Layer after the currently selected one in the List.
Edit
Edit the selected Layer.
Del
Delete the selected Layer. The default layer cannot be deleted. The
layer to be deleted should not have any objects.

Layer
Layer Name
Name of the Layer.
Visible
Check to make this layer Visible.
Note
Enter a note here for the Layer.

6-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Layers

Style
Line Style
Select the Style for the lines to be displayed in this layer and also the
width.
Point Type
Select the icon for the points to be displayed in this layer.
Layer Color
Select the color for the lines and points in this layer.

Color Palette
Color
Select the Color for the objects to be displayed on the map.

Objects
Display a list of Point, Lines and Alignments belonging to the Raw
Data
The Raw Data listed includes information on the:
• Name: Point name and the icon displaying the type of the point.
• Type: The type of measurement.
• Codes: Codes for the point, also the Strings associated with the
codes if the String display is selected.
• HI/Ant Ht: For the Optical mode - the height of the instrument;
For the GPS+ mode - the antenna height.
• Coordinates: Coordinates of the point.
• Ctrl Code: Control codes associated with the point.
• Notes: The short note for the point.
• Local Time: It is the controller time when the point was stored.
For points collected in the GPS mode, its the time of the epoch
whose coordinates are stored or the time of the last accepted
epoch when averaging.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-19


Editing Job Data

First/Last
Moves the cursor to the first or last point.
Edit
Opens the Edit Raw Data dialog which allows you to edit user-
entered raw data.
Recompute
Recomputes the point coordinates after editing the point's raw data.
Find by Point
Finds a point by its name or a part of its name.
Find by Code
Finds a point by its code.
Find Next
Finds the next point that satisfies the same conditions as the previous
found point.
The button in the upper-left corner of the dialog enables the following
menu:
• Job Info: displays the Job Info dialog.
• Show Raw GPS+/TS: If the GPS+ mode is active, the GPS+ raw
data is displayed by default. If you want to display the TS raw
data in the list, select this menu. Similarly, if you are using the
Optical mode, the TS raw data is displayed and optionally the
GPS+ raw data.
• Angle Sets Report: This menu item will only be displayed when
we are in TS mode and the job contains angle sets which have
been acquired. Click the option to get the Angle Sets Report.
More...

Setup Selection
An angle set is a group of total station observations at the occupation
point which are taken at the same time and constitute a measurement
to a point. This group can have a number of different foresight and
backsight sequences.

6-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Layers

The Setup Selection dialog displays a list of all of the occupations in


the job which have angle sets associated with them. The Occupation
column displays the points where the occupations was set up. The
#Sets column displays the number of angle sets taken at the
occupation. The HI column displays the instrument height of the
occupation.
To generate an angle sets report:
• Select the check boxes associated with the occupations for which
you want to get the report.
• To select all the occupations in the list, click Select All.
• To erase all selections of occupations, click Clear All.
• Click the Report button to generate the Angle Sets Report.

Angle Sets Report


The Angle Sets Report allows you:
• To review detailed report information on the individual angle sets
of only the occupations selected in the Setup Selection dialog.

• To save the generated report to a file, click the icon . The


file will be saved in the Report folder.

Edit Raw Data


The Edit Raw Data dialog displays the properties of the selected
record and allows you to change the name, code, notes, and record
specific parameters.
Displays either the Mark or PC (Phase Center) Coords of the base
station. The point, code, and antenna information is available for
display and editing only if we have the Mark Coordinates available
for the base. The Mark coordinates can be edited only if the point was
manually entered or if it is a design point. The PC coordinates cannot
be edited.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-21


Editing Job Data

List of Stake Reports


Displays a list of existing reports in the job. The red asterisk icon near
the report name means that the report is set as current for this type.
View
Show the full report selected.
Delete
Remove the highlighted report from the list. You will have to confirm
the deletion twice before the report data is deleted.
Edit
Edit the report selected in the list.
Add
Create a new report.

Edit Stake Report


Name
Enter the name of the report selected.
Report Type
Select the report type from the list.
Configuration
Edit the report configuration for the report type selected in the list.
Set Current
If checked, set a new report current.

View Stake Report


Displays design references and appropriate information for this report
type.

6-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Background Images

Background Images
The Image List dialog displays a list of available images for the
background.
Add
Opens the Add Image dialog to browse the directories on the
controller to add a file to the list.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected file from the list.
OK
Opens the selected file. If the file does not exist or there is an error, a
warning message is displayed, and the Image List dialog will appear
again so you can select another file.
Cancel
Exits out of the dialog without changes.
Only one GeoTiff file can be selected at a time. More file types will
be added later. To use a file once it is added, make sure the file is
checked in the list. If no file is selected, then a background image will
not appear in the map.

Properties
This dialog displays the Properties of the selected file.
File Name
The image's file name without extension.
File Path
The image's location on the device or PC.
File Type
Specifies the file type of the image.
Units
Allows you to select the units in which the image file is scaled.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-23


Editing Job Data

Use World File


The Use World File check box tells you whether or not the image
needs a World File to be plotted properly.

Roads Folder

Click the icon to open the Edit Roads folder.


Click an icon to perform the task:

Roads
Edits properties of existing roads and creates new roads.

Horizontal
Edits an available horizontal alignment and creates a
new one.

Vertical
Edits an available vertical alignment and creates a new
one.

Templates
Edits properties of an existing x-section template and
creates a new one.

X-Sections
Edits available x-sections and creates a new one.

String Set
Edits an existing set of strings and creates a new set.

6-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Roads

Roads
The Roads dialog displays a list of the created roads and plots of the
horizontal and vertical alignments of the selected Road.
Add
Select the Add Road dialog to create a new Road.
Edit
Opens the Edit Road dialog, displaying the parameters of the selected
road.
Delete
Deletes the selected road from the job.

Add/Edit Roads
In this dialog you can edit the properties of a Road Alignment. The
dialog consists of two separate tabs with Alignment properties. The
properties are the following:
Alignment tab
Name
The name of the Road Alignment.
Layer
A combo box where you can select the layer in which this road should
be placed. The associated button brings up the layer properties dialog.
Hz Alnt
In this combo box you'll find all available Horizontal Alignments.
Select one for your Road. The associated button brings up the
Horizontal Alignment list where you can add, edit and delete
Horizontal Alignments.
Vt Alnt
In this combo box you'll find all available Vertical Alignments. Select
one for your Road. The associated button brings up the Vertical

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-25


Editing Job Data

Alignment list where you can add, edit and delete Vertical
Alignments.
Start Station/Stn/Chainage
Here you can enter the Start Station of the Road. Start Station is the
start position along the Road Alignment.
Station/Stn Interval
This is the interval at which the next station position will be decided.
Negative values can be entered, which will cause the advancement to
decrease instead of increase along the line.
Surface tab
X-Sect Set / String Set
This button can toggle between X-Sect Set and String Set. Toggling
between the two will change the contents of the combo box and the
button. If you wish to associate your Road with a Cross Section or a
String Set, please select one here.
Working Corridor: Left
Enter the left side working corridor here. The left side must be lower
or equal to the right corridor.
Working Corridor: Right
Enter the right side working corridor here.

Start Point
The Start Pt tab displays the parameters of the road starting point.
Point
The point name can be entered manually (if a new point name is
entered, the point will be created with the coordinates entered in the
North, East and Height fields) or chosen from the map or from the
list.
Code
The point code and attributes can be entered manually or chosen from
the drop-down list for a new point.

6-26 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Roads

North, East, Height


The local coordinates of the point.
Start Sta/Start Chain
The starting station or the starting chain distance.
Sta Interval
The interval between the points where the road related computations
are made.

Vertical Alignment
The Vert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements, or long
sections (for the Long Section vertical alignment type), the vertical
alignment plot, and the starting station (or chainage) at each element.
In the case of the Element vertical alignment type, the element list has
the following columns:
Element: the icon and the name of the element: vertical grade or
parabola.
Length: the length of the element;
Start Grade, End Grade: the grades of the element, in percentage, at
the starting and ending points. For a Vertical grade element these
values are the same.
In the case of the Long Sections vertical alignment type, the element
list has the following columns: Long Section: the name of the
element.
Station: the station distance.
Elevation: the elevation value on the station.
VC Length: the vertical curve length is the length of the interval near
the station, where the alignment has a parabolic shape.
Add
Displays a floating menu from which to select an element or the Long
Section dialog for adding a vertical element after the last element.
Insert
Displays a floating menu from which to select elements or the Long
Section dialog for insertion at the selected location in the list.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-27


Editing Job Data

Add/Edit Road
The first Road dialog is used to set the name of the road and select the
VAL (vertical alignment) type of the created road.
Name
Enter a name for the Road.
VAL Type
There are two ways to create vertical elements for roads.
• Long Section: Select Long Section to create the road by sections.
The vertical alignment is presented as a set of sections between
the stations where the heights are known (usually these are the
extremums of the vertical alignment line), and the interval around
the station where the vertical alignment line has a parabolic
shape.
• Elements: Select Elements to create the vertical curve using either
Vertical Grades or Parabolas.

Long Section
The Long Section dialog contains parameters of the section.
Station
The station distance from the beginning of the road.
Height/Elevation
The height at the station.
Curve Type
Select if the curve is either a Parabola or Circular Arc.
VC length
Available when the Curve Type is Parabola. The length of the vertical
curve at the station. (It is assumed that the station is located in the
middle of the interval.)
Arc Radius
Available when the Curve Type is Circular Arc. Enter the radius of
the Arc.

6-28 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Roads

Horizontal Alignment
The Hz tab shows the list of horizontal alignment elements, the
horizontal alignment plot and the starting station (or chainage) of
each element.
The element list has the following columns:
• Element: the icon and the name of the element: line, spiral, curve,
or intersection point
• Length: the length of the element
• Azimuth: the azimuth at the beginning of the element
• Radius: the radius of the curve, spiral or intersection point (the
radius of the spiral is the radius at the end of the 'incoming' spiral
or at the beginning of the 'exiting' spiral; the radius of the
intersection point is the radius of the corresponding curve.)
• A1: Spiral constant 1: Length of Tangent-Spiral to Spiral-Curve.
The spiral constant is the square root of the product of the length
and the radius of the spiral.
• A2: Spiral constant 2: Length of Curve-Spiral to Spiral-Tangent.
The spiral constant is the square root of the product of the length
and the radius of the spiral.
Add
Displays a floating menu from which to select elements for adding
after the last element.
Insert
Displays a floating menu from which to select elements for insertion
at the selected location in the list.
Edit
Opens a dialog with properties of the selected element.
Delete
Deletes the element from the road.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-29


Editing Job Data

Line
To add a line, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Hz tab of the Add
Road dialog and select the Line item from the floating menu. The
Line dialog will open. The plot at the bottom-left corner will show the
element's appearance.
Length
The length of the line element.
Azimuth
By default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element. This
field may be edited only for the starting element of the road. To
change the azimuth of all other elements, the check mark from the
Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper-left corner
of the dialog should be removed.

NOTICE NOTICE
Caution should be exercised when setting the azimuth,
since road elements are usually tangential to each other.

Curve
To add a curve, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Hz tab of the
Add Road dialog and select the Curve item from the floating menu.
The Curve dialog will open. The plot in the bottom-left corner will
show the element's appearance.
Radius/ Deg Chord/ Deg Curve
The radius of the curve or one of the two parameters unambiguously
defining the radius: degree of chord, or degree of curve.
Length/Chord/Tangent/Mid Ord/Delta/External
The length of the curve element or one of four parameters
unambiguously defining the curve length: chord, tangent, middle
ordinate (the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the midpoint of
the corresponding curve), delta (the angle between the radii
corresponding to the curve) or external (a section of a line connecting
the center of the arc with vertex of the angle).

6-30 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Roads

Azimuth
By default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element. This
field may be edited only for the starting element of the road. To
change the azimuth of all other elements, the check mark from the
Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper-left corner
of the dialog should be removed.
Turn
The direction of turn. The Right value stands for clockwise direction
and the Left value for counterclockwise direction.

Spiral
To add a spiral, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Hz tab of the
Add Road dialog and select the Spiral item from the floating menu.
The Spiral dialog will open.
Radius/ Deg Chord/ Deg Curve
The radius of the curve or one of two parameters unambiguously
defining the radius: degree of chord, or degree of curve
Length/ Sp Const
Enter either the Length or Sp Const (Spiral Constant) for the Spiral.
The Spiral Constant is the square root of the product of the length and
the radius of the spiral.
Azimuth
By default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element. This
field may be edited only for the starting element of the road. To
change the azimuth of all other elements, the check mark from the
Tangent to Previous Item menu on the bitmap in the upper-left corner
of the dialog should be removed.
Turn
The direction of turn. The Right value stands for clockwise direction
and the Left value for counterclockwise direction.
Dir

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-31


Editing Job Data

The direction of movement along the spiral, TS (traverse-spiral) to SC


(spiral-circle) (entering the turn), or CS (circle-spiral) to ST (spiral-
traverse) (exiting the turn).

Intersection Point
To add an intersection point, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Hz
tab of the Add Road dialog and select the Intersection Point item from
the floating menu.
Point
The name of the intersection point or select it from the map or the list.
Either enter the name or the North and East coordinates.
North, East
The plane coordinates of the intersection point cannot be changed for
an existing point.
Radius/ Deg Chord/ Deg Curve
The radius of the curve or one of two parameters unambiguously
defining the radius: degree of chord, or degree of curve
Length1/ Sp Const1, Length2/ Sp Const2
Enter either the Length or Sp Const (Spiral Constant) for the Spiral.
The Spiral Constant is the square root of the product of the length and
the radius of the spiral.

Vertical Alignment
The Vert tab shows the list of vertical alignment elements, or long
sections (for the Long Section vertical alignment type), the vertical
alignment plot, and the starting station (or chainage) at each element.
In the case of the Element vertical alignment type, the element list has
the following columns:
• Element: the icon and the name of the element: vertical grade or
parabola.
• Length: the length of the element;

6-32 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Roads

• Start Grade, End Grade: the grades of the element, in percentage,


at the starting and ending points. For a Vertical grade element
these values are the same.
In the case of the Long Sections vertical alignment type, the element
list has the following columns:
• Long Section: the name of the element.
• Station: the station distance.
• Elevation: the elevation value on the station.
• VC Length: the vertical curve length is the length of the interval
near the station, where the alignment has a parabolic shape.
Add
Displays a floating menu from which to select an element or the Long
Section dialog for adding a vertical element after the last element.
Insert
Displays a floating menu from which to select elements or the Long
Section dialog for insertion at the selected location in the list.

Vertical Grade
To add a vertical grade, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Vert tab
of the Add Road dialog, and select the Vertical Grade item from the
floating menu.
Length
The length of the vertical grade element.
Grade
The grade of the element in percents. If the grade is falling, the value
should be set to negative.

Curve
To add a curve, press the Insert or Add buttons in the Vert tab of the
Add Road dialog, and select the Curve item from the floating menu.
Curve Type
Select if the curve is either a Parabola or Circular Arc.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-33


Editing Job Data

Length
Available when the curve type is Parabola. The length of the parabola
element.
Arc Radius
Available when the curve type is Circular Arc. The radius of the
element.
Start Grade, End Grade
The starting and ending grades of the element, in percents. If the
grade is falling, the value should be set negative.

X-Section
The X-Section tab contains a list of stations, where cross section
templates are applied. It also displays a general view of the cross
section.
The list of templates contains the following columns:
• Station: The station where the template is applied.
• Left X Section, Right X Section: The names of the templates for
the left and right parts of the road relative to the center line. The
left and right cross sections can be different.

NOTICE NOTICE
If two or more templates are defined, the intermediate
cross sections are calculated using interpolation.

Add
Opens a blank X-Section dialog.
Edit
Opens the X-Section dialog with properties of the selected cross
section.
Delete
Deletes the station from the list.

6-34 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Roads

X-Section
The X-section dialog contains the parameters of the cross section.
Station
The station distance.
Left X-Section, Right X-Section
The cross section templates for the left and right parts of the road.
These can be chosen only from the existing cross section templates.

Calculate Road Points


The Calculate Road Points dialog allows you to generate points along
to the right and to the left of the center line of the road along its entire
length.
Points to Generate
Defines the points to generate - center line points, the points to the
right of the center line, and/or the points to the left of the center line.
Also, if it is desired to include the transition points, place the check
mark in the corresponding field and select a prefix/suffix for them, if
necessary, in the appearing field below.
Station Interval
Sets the interval between the generated points. By default it is the
Station Interval set in the Start Pt tab in the Roads dialog.
Next
Opens the CL Points Params dialog.

Centerline Point Params


The CL Points Params dialog displays the parameters of points to be
computed along the center line.
First Point
The name of the first point.
Code

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-35


Editing Job Data

The code and attributes of the points being generated entered


manually or chosen from the drop-down list.
Prefix/Suffix
When chosen, sets the prefix or suffix to be added to the generated
point name.
Save points to Point List
Check if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate
points list. When checked, a field appears where the name for the list
can be set.

Right/Left Offset Points Params


Displays the parameters of points to be computed to the right or left
of the center line.
First Point
The name of the first point.
Code
The code and attributes of the points being generated entered
manually or chosen from the drop-down list.
Prefix/Suffix
When chosen, sets the prefix or suffix to be added to the generated
point name.
Save points to Point List
Check if it is necessary to save the generated points to a separate
points list. When checked, a field appears where the name for the list
can be set.
Offsets
Set the offset of the point from the center line along two dimensions:
horizontal (the Right field) and vertical (the Up/Down field) relative
to the surface (Surface Offset type) or to the horizontal line (Flat
Offset type).

6-36 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Horizontal Alignments

Horizontal Alignments
The horizontal alignments dialog contains three basic parts:
The alignment list
A list with all available horizontal alignments.
The alignment preview
A preview window displaying the currently selected horizontal
alignment
The edit buttons
Delete
Select the alignment you wish to delete, and then press this button.
You'll be asked for confirmation.
Edit
Edit a currently selected alignment.
Add
Add an entirely new alignment.

Vertical Alignments
The vertical alignments dialog contains three basic parts:
The alignment list
A list with all available vertical alignments.
The alignment preview
A preview window displaying the currently selected vertical
alignment.
The edit buttons
Delete
Select the alignment you wish to delete, and then press this button.
You'll be asked for confirmation.
Edit

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-37


Editing Job Data

Edit a currently selected alignment.


Add
Add an entirely new alignment.

High/Low Positions
This dialog will display any extremums found along a vertical
alignment. The types of extremums found are the high or low
positions of arcs, curves and the transition points between two
straight lines.
The dialog consists of three parts:
• Alnt Name: The name of the vertical alignment.
• List: A list with high/low positions data.
• The MAGNET Field menu: "Save to File".
The High/Low Positions list contain the following data:
Station (Unit)
The station along the vertical alignment.
Type
"High" or "Low" position.
Ell ht/Elevation (Unit)
Ellipsodial height or Elevation, depending on the coordinate system
used.
Radius (Unit)
Radius of an arc with a high/low extremum.

Save to File will save the current listing to a file with a standard
file name: "HighLowPositions.txt". The file name is selected by
you.

6-38 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


X-Section Templates

X-Section Templates
The X-Sect Templates dialog displays a list of the existing templates
in the upper part of the dialog and a plot of the highlighted template in
the lower part.
The list contains three columns:
• Name (the name of the template)
• Cut Slope
• Fill Slope values
Add
Opens the blank X-Sect Templates dialog.
Edit
Opens the properties of the selected template.
Delete
Deletes the template from the list.

X-Sect Template
The X-Sect Template dialog contains parameters for the template.
Name
The name of the template.
Slope
The Cut and Fill parameter values (run values for cut and fill for a
unit rise). These values represent the horizontal increment of the
slope for a unit vertical increment. The Cut slope is used when the
road surface is below the terrain, and the Fill Slope is used when the
road surface is above the terrain.
Also the dialog contains a list of segments comprising the template
and a plot of the template. A list of segments consists of three
columns: Code (the code of the segment), Hz (the horizontal offset),
Vert (the vertical offset).
Add

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-39


Editing Job Data

Opens the blank Segment dialog. The added segment will be attached
after the last segment in the list.
Insert
Opens the blank Segment dialog. The added segment is inserted in the
list above the currently highlighted segment.
Edit
Opens the Segment dialog with the parameters of the highlighted
segment.
Delete
Deletes the segment from the template.

Segment
The Segment dialog contains the parameters of the segment.
Segment Point
The name of the segment point.
Offset
The horizontal and vertical offsets. Press the Down/Up/Grade button
to select the type and value of the vertical offset. Being input as Grade
(in %), the vertical offset will be recalculated to meters (or other
selected units) after the OK button is pressed.

X-Section Set
This dialog contains a list with all available cross section sets. The
dialog consists of five separate parts:
List
Each available cross section set is listed here by its name. The cross
sections are sorted by their add date.
Preview
The selected cross section will be previewed on the dialog.
Delete

6-40 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


String Set

The delete button is used for deleting one or more cross sections. If
the cross section being deleted contains references to cross section
templates; these will also be removed if you choose to do so.
Edit
Select one cross section for editing.
Add
Add a new cross section.

String Set
The String Set dialog lists the currently available String Sets. It
consists of a list, a preview window, and three buttons:
String Set list
The list containing all available String Sets.
Preview window
Displays the currently selected String Set.
Delete
For deleting one or more String Sets. Multiple String Sets can be
deleted at the same time.
Edit
For editing a single String Set.
Add
For adding a single String Set.

Add/Edit String Set


This dialog is displayed when adding a new String Set or editing an
existing one.
The dialog is separated into four distinct parts:
String Set

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-41


Editing Job Data

The name of the current String Set. If you're editing a current String
Set, it is possible to change the name of the String Set by changing the
name in the input box.
String Sets list
This list contains all the Strings that the String Set consists of. It is
possible to change the order of the Strings by using the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the Strings list.
Preview window
This window will display the currently selected String. It can be
hidden with the arrow button in the right bottom corner.
Edit buttons
There are three buttons available for manipulating the Strings within
the String Set. The first one is Delete, which will delete all the
selected Strings. The second one is Edit which will edit the currently
selected String (double-clicking on the String will also edit it). The
third one is Add for adding a new String to the current String Set.

Add/Edit Road String Alignment Pair


Add or Edit a Road String Alignment Pair.
This dialog is separated into three parts:
Hz Alnt and Vt Alnt
Select the horizontal and vertical alignment you want the Alignment
Pair to consist of.
Select
From Line
Create an alignment pair from a Line.
From Map
Select a Line from a Map and create the Alignment Pair from it.
MAGNET Field menu
Hz Alnt

6-42 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


String Set

Displays the horizontal alignment dialog where you can add, edit, or
delete horizontal alignments.
Vt Alnt
Displays the vertical alignment dialog where you can add, edit, or
delete vertical alignments.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 6-43


Editing Job Data

Notes:

6-44 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 7

Calculate
The icon represents the Calculate Folder.

Click an icon to calculate the task:

Inverse
The four inverse tasks available in the Inverse menu are
based on computing the azimuth and distance between
two points given their coordinates.

Point in Direction
Calculates the coordinates of a point using a known
point, and the angle and distance offsets from the known
point.

Intersection
Computes the intersection point or points given to
known points and either the direction or distance from
the known point.

Calculator
Does calculations and conversion. Type in the entire
equation you want to calculate, press equals, and the
result is shown.

Curves
Computes a full set of parameters to determine a curve
using four various minimum sets of specified
parameters.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-1


Calculate

Area
Calculates the area of a polygon formed by any points or
the coordinates of a point/points which form a polygon
of the desired area after being added to the point list/
linework/area.

Corner Angle
Calculates the angle between two lines, a start line and
an end line, which have a common mid point.

Offsets
Calculates the coordinates of points along a line, a curve,
or a road.

Adjust
Transforms points and includes five tasks: Rotate,
Translate, Scale, 2D Transform, and Traverse
Adjustment.

Traverse
Calculates traverse and sideshot points based on
horizontal and vertical offsets along a direction which is
defined by an azimuth or right, left or deflection angles.

DTM 
Calculates data between two DTMs, for a new DTM,
and along contour lines.

Calculate Inverse

The icon represents the Calculate Inverse feature.

7-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Click an icon to calculate the task:

Point To Point
Computes the inverse (azimuth and distance) between
two known points.

Point to Line
Computes the station of a known point inverse to a
known line.

Point to List
Computes the inverse (azimuth and distance) for all the
points in a Points list with respect to a known point.

Point to Curve
Calculates the station of the known point inverse to the
known curve.

Two Point Inverse


The Two-Point Inverse task computes the inverse (azimuth and
distance) between two known points.
The Inverse Page contains the data needed for the task:
From
Select the starting point.
To
Select the ending point.
These points can be entered manually, selected from the map or from
the list of Job Points.
Calc
Calculates the inverse.
The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:
Azimuth to the second point from the first point.
HDist is the horizontal distance from one point to another.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-3


Calculate

VDist is the vertical distance from one point to another. The "-" sign
means that the height of the second point is lower than the height of
the first point.
dNorth is the increment of the North coordinate.
dEast is the increment of the East coordinate.
dHeight is the increment of the height.
Grade(Slope) - the increment of the height in percent.
Slope distance - the computed distance between the two points.

Inverse Point to Line


The Inverse Point to Line COGO task computes the station of a
known point inverse to a known line.
The Inverse Point to Line page contains the data needed to calculate
the offsets of the point with respect to the line:
Point
Select the known point name. It can be entered or selected from the
map or the list of Job Points.
Code
Displays the code of the known point and cannot be changed here.
Start Point
Select the starting point of the reference line.
Azimuth/Az to Pt
Set the azimuth of the reference line manually. For Az to Pt, select
another point, and the azimuth from the known point to this point will
indicate the direction.
Start Stn
Set the starting station of the reference line.
Store PTL Point
If Az to Pt is selected, check if the known point is to be stored as a
PTL point.
Calc
Press to calculate the inverse.

7-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:
From Point is the name of the known point.
Start Point is the name of the starting point of the line.
Azimuth is the azimuth of the known line.
Start Station is the starting station of the line.
Station indicates the distance between the starting point and the
projection of the known point on the reference line.
Offset is the horizontal offset between the known point and the
Station point.
Height is the vertical offset between the known point and the Station
point.

Inverse Point to Curve


The Inverse Point to Curve COGO task computes the station of a
known point inverse to a known curve.
Point
Select the known point name. It can be entered, or selected from the
map or list of Job Points.
Curve
The Inverse Point to Curve page contains the data needed to
calculate the offsets of the point with respect to the curve.
The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first curve
point chosen. You can enter, select from the list, or select from the
map the following two sets of points:
• PC Point, Curve Point, PT Point
• RP Point, PC Point, PT Point
In the second case, the distance between RP Point and PC point
should be equal to distance between RP Point and PT point. The
radius and the PC and PT points define two curves - one with delta
less than or equal to 180 degrees (Small curve) and the other with
delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees (Large curve). Values of
Small or Large can be selected from the Curve drop-down box to
indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations.
Start Stn

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-5


Calculate

Set the starting station of the reference curve.


Calc
Press to calculate the curve parameters.
The Results page shows the initial data and the results of the
calculation:
• Tangent Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent at the point of
intersection of the curve and the line joining the point of
intersection to the radius point.
• Sta indicates the distance between the starting station and the
point of intersection of the curve and the line joining the point of
intersection to the radius point.
• Offset is the horizontal offset between the known point and the
Station point.
• dHeight is the vertical offset between the known point and the
Station point.

Inverse Point to Point List


The Inverse point to point list COGO task computes the inverse
(azimuth and distance) for all the points in a Points list with respect to
a known point.
The Inverse Pt to Pt List Page contains the data needed for the task,
the list of points in the selected point list and a window for the plot of
the point list:
Point
Select the known point. This can be entered manually, selected from
the map or the list of Job Points.
Point List
Select the point list. The name can be entered or selected from the list
of job Point Lists.
List of Points
Displays the list of points in the selected point list along with their
codes.

7-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calc
Press to calculate the inverse.
The Results Page shows the following results of the calculation for
every point in the point list:
Azimuth to the point in the point list from the known point.
HDist is the horizontal distance from one point to another.
VDist is the vertical distance from one point to another. The "-" sign
means that the height of the point in the list is lower than the height of
the known point.
dNorth is the increment of the North coordinate.
dEast is the increment of the East coordinate.
dHeight is the increment of the height.
Grade(Slope) - the increment of the height in percent.
Slope distance - the computed distance between the two known
points and the point in the list.

Point in Direction
The Point in Direction COGO task calculates the coordinates of a
point, using a known point, the azimuth, the angle offset from the
azimuth line and the distance offsets from the known Point.
From Point
Set the starting point. It can be entered manually, selected from the
list of Job Points or from the map.
Azimuth/Az to Pt
Set the azimuth either by value or as a direction to another known
point.
Angle Offset
Set the angle offset from the azimuth line.
HD Grd/Gnd
Set the grid or ground distance offset along the angle offset line. To
alternate between grid or ground press the button.
Vert Dist

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-7


Calculate

Set the height offset.


Cogo Pt
Set the name of the computed point.
Code
Set the code of the computed point.
Calc
Press to calculate the coordinates of the unknown point.
The Results Page shows the following results of the calculation. The
coordinates are displayed for both the computed points:
North is the northing coordinate of the point.
East is the easting coordinate of the point.
Ell Ht is the height of the point.
Azimuth from the known point to the unknown point.
Hz Distance is the horizontal distance between the two points.
Vert Distance is the vertical distance between the two points.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

Calculate Curves

The icon represents the Calculate Curves feature.

Click an icon to calculate the task:

Curve
Calculates the full set of curve parameters given one
length and one radius parameter.

7-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


3Pt Curve
Computes the curve parameters given three points:
starting point of the curve (PC point), any curve point
and ending point of the curve (PT point), the Radius
point, and PC and PT points.

PI & Tangents
Computes the starting, ending and center points of a
curve, given the point of intersection, the radius, and the
azimuths from the PI point to the PC and PT points
respectively.

Radius & Pts


Computes the parameters and the coordinates of the
center of a curve given the starting and ending points of
the curve and a radius parameter.

Curve Solution
The Curve Solution COGO task calculates the full set of curve
parameters given one length and one radius parameter.
The Curve Solution page contains the data needed for the task and a
window for the plot of the curve:
Radius/Deg Chord/Deg Curve
Select the curvature parameter.
Length/Chord/Tangent/Mid Ord
Select the length parameter of the curve.
Turn
Select the direction of turn relative to the starting point.
Calc
Press to calculate the parameters of the curve.
The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-9


Calculate

Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent
points) of the curve.
Degree Curve defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of a curve with a length of 100 units.
Degree Chord defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of curve whose chord is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the
tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and
the curve (along the line joining the point of intersection to the radius
point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the
chord on the line joining the point of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc
that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc
they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at
the end points of the arc.

PI & Tangents
The PI and Tangents COGO task computes the starting (PC) and
ending (PT) points, and the center (Radius Point) of a Curve, given
the Point of Intersection (PI), the radius, and the azimuths from the PI
point to the PC, and PT points, respectively.
The PI & Tangents page contains the data needed for the task:
PI Point
Set the Point of Intersection. It can be manually entered, chosen from
the map or from the list of Job Points.
Az PI to PC
Set the azimuth from the PI point to the starting curve point.
Az PI to PT
Set the azimuth from the PI point to the ending curve point.

7-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Radius/Deg Curve/Deg Chord/Tangent
Set the appropriate radius parameter of the curve.
PC Point
Set the name and the code for the calculated starting curve point.
PT Point
Set the name and the code for the calculated ending curve point.
RP Point
Set the name and the code for the calculated radius point.
Calc
Press to calculate the parameters of the curve and the coordinates of
the PC, PT, and RP points.
The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:
North is the northing coordinate of the PC/PT/RP point.
East is the easting coordinate of the PC/PT/RP point.
Ell Ht is the height of the PC/PT/RP point.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent
points) of the curve.
Degree Curve defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of a curve with a length of 100 units.
Degree Chord defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of the curve whose chord is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the
tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and
the curve (along the line joining the point of intersection to the radius
point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the
chord on the line joining the point of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc
that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-11


Calculate

they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at
the end points of the arc.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

Three Pt Curve
The Three Pt Curve COGO task computes the curve parameters given
three points: starting point of the curve (PC point), any curve point
and ending point of the curve (PT point), or the Radius point and PC
and PT points.
The Three Points Curve page displays the initial data for the task.
The dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first point
chosen. You can manually enter, select from the list or from the map
the following sets of points:
• PC Point, Curve Point, PT Point
• RP Point, PC Point, PT Point
In the first case the coordinates for the RP Point will be calculated
along with the curve parameters. The name and the code for this
calculated point can be set.
In the second case the distance between RP Point and PC point
should be equal to the distance between RP Point and PT point. The
radius, and the PC and PT points define two curves - one with delta
less than or equal to 180 degrees (Small curve) and the other with
delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees (Large curve). Values of
Small or Large can be selected from the Curve drop-down box to
indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations.
Calc
Press to calculate the curve parameters.
The Results page shows the results of the calculation:
North is the northing coordinate of the RP point.
East is the easting coordinate of the RP point.

7-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Ell Ht is the height of the RP point.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent
points) of the curve.
Degree Curve defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of the curve with a length of 100 units.
Degree Chord defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of the curve whose chord is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the
tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and
the curve (along the line joining the point of intersection to the radius
point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the
chord on the line joining the point of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc
that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc
they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at
the end points of the arc.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

Radius & Points


The Radius & Points COGO task computes the parameters, and the
coordinates of the center of a curve (RP point) given the starting (PC
point) and ending points (PT point) of the curve, and a radius
parameter.
The Radius & Point page contains the initial data for the task:
PC Point
Set the Point of Curvature. It can be manually entered, selected from
the map or from the list of Job points.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-13


Calculate

PT Point
Set the Point of Tangency. It can be manually entered, selected from
the map or from the list of Job points.
Radius/Deg Curve/Deg Chord
Set the radius parameter of the curve.
Turn
Set the direction of turn relative to the PC Point.
Curve
Set the curve in the circle that should be considered. The radius, and
the PC and PT points define two curves - one with delta less than or
equal to 180 degrees (Small curve), and the other with delta greater
than or equal to 180 degrees (Large curve).
RP Point
Enter the name, code, and attributes of the computed radius point.
Calc
Press to calculate the curve parameters and the coordinates of the RP
point.
The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:
North is the northing coordinate of the RP point.
East is the easting coordinate of the RP point.
Ell Ht is the height of the RP point.
Radius of the curve.
Length of the curve.
Chord is the distance between the starting and ending points (tangent
points) of the curve.
Degree Curve defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of the curve with a length of 100 units.
Degree Chord defines the angle in degrees which is used to compute
the radius of the curve whose chord is 100 units long.
Delta is the internal angle from center to tangent points.
Tangent is the distance between the point of intersection of the
tangents at the starting and ending points, and the ending point.
External is the shortest distance between the point of intersection and

7-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


the curve (along the line joining the point of intersection to the radius
point).
Mid Ord is the length of the line segment between the curve and the
chord on the line joining the point of intersection to the radius point.
Segment is the area of a circle bounded by a chord and the minor arc
that it cuts off.
Sector is the area of a circle bounded by two radii and the minor arc
they determine.
Fillet is the area between the arc of a circle and the two tangents at
the end points of the arc.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

Intersection
Intersection dialog can be used to compute the intersection point or
points given two known points and either the direction or distance
from the known point.
The Intersection Page contains the initial data for the Intersection
task.
Point 1
Select the first point. This can be manually entered, selected from the
job list, or map.
Azimuth/Distance/Az to Pt
Select the parameter that will be entered for the first point. This can
be done by clicking this button. The text indicates what the value will
be interpreted as. For Az to Pt, select another point, and the azimuth
from point 1 to this point will indicate the direction.
Point 2
Select the second point. This can be manually entered, selected from
the Job list, or map.
Azimuth/Distance/Az to Pt

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-15


Calculate

Select the parameter that will be entered for the first point. This can
be done by clicking this button. The text indicates what the value will
be interpreted as. For Az to Pt, select another point, and the azimuth
from point 2 to this point will indicate the direction.
COGO Point
Select the name and Code for the result of the calculation.
Calc
Starts the calculation process.
The Results Page shows the results of the calculation.
North: the North local coordinate of the first/second found point.
East: the East local coordinate of the first/second found point.
Ell ht: the height of the first/second found point.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

Calculator
The calculator is a powerful tool that does all sorts of calculations and
conversions. It is very easy to use. Type in the entire equation you
want to calculate, press equals, and the result is shown.
• Input Field: This field is where calculations are done. It will
accept an entire calculation, and then once equals is pressed it
will calculate everything at once.
• Result Field: Once equals is pressed the result is calculated and
presented here. This field is also used as the y or theta values for
rectangular/polar conversions.
• Previous Result Field: Once equals is pressed the previous result
is moved up to this field. This field is also used as the x or r values
for rectangular/polar conversions.
• sin: Function that calculates the sine.

7-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

• cos: Function that calculates the cosine.


• tan: Function that calculates the tangent.
• arcsin: Function that calculates the arcsine.
• arccos: Function that calculates the arccosine.
• arctan: Function that calculates the arctangent.
• log: Function that calculates the logarithmic value base 10.
• ln: Function that calculates the natural logarithmic value or base
e.
• square root: Function that calculates the square root of a value.
• x squared: Function that calculates the square of a value.
• inverse: Function that calculates the inverse of a value or 1/x.
• nth power: Function that calculates the nth power of a value in the
format x ^ power.
• percent: Converts the value to a percent or x/100.
• MC: Clears the memory.
• MR: Recalls the memory value indicated by M in the input field.
• MS: Saves the already computed result into memory.
• M+: Adds the already computed result to the value in memory.
• Rad Deg: Function that converts radians to degrees.
• Deg Rad: Function that converts degrees to radians.
• Grad Deg: Function that converts gradians to degrees.
• Deg Grad: Function that converts degrees to gradians.
• Deg DMS: Function that converts degrees to degrees minutes
seconds notation.
• DMS Deg: Function that converts degrees minutes seconds
notation to degrees.
• Rec Pol: Function that converts rectangular coordinates (xy) to
polar (r theta). This is done by using both result fields, the top one
being x, bottom one being y. Enter the values and click Rec Pol,
and it will convert the top value to r and bottom to theta.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-17


Calculate

• DMS Deg: Function that converts polar coordinates (r theta) to


rectangular (xy). This is done by using both result fields, the top
one being r, bottom one being theta. Enter the values and click
Pol Rec, and it will convert the top value to x and bottom to y.
• DMS+: Adds the left and right values assuming both are in DMS
form.
• DMS-: Subtract the right value from the left assuming both are in
DMS form.
• e: The constant e, base of the natural logarithm.
• pi: The constant pi, the circumference to diameter ratio for any
circle.
• C: Clears out all the fields.
• <-: Backspace, removes the last entry.
• copy: If the calculator was started from an edit field, it copies the
value back to that field.
• std: Brings up the standard calculator.
• Deg: If this is showing, it means the calculator is working in
degrees.
• Grad: If this is showing, it means the calculator is working in
gradians.
• Rad: If this is showing, it means the calculator is working in
radians.
• +/-: Alternates the value between positive and negative.

Calculator
The calculator is a powerful tool to do all sorts of calculations and
conversions. It is very easy to use. Type in the entire equation you
want to calculate, press equals, and the result is shown.
• Input Field: This field is where calculations are done. It will
accept an entire calculation and then once equals is pressed it will
calculate everything at once.

7-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

• Result Field: Once equals is pressed the result is calculated and


presented here. This field is also used as the y or theta values for
rectangular/polar conversions.
• Previous Result Field: Once equals is pressed the previous result
is moved up to this field. This field is also used as the x or r values
for rectangular/polar conversions.
• square root: Function that calculates the square root of a value.
• x squared: Function that calculates the square of a value.
• inverse: Function that calculates the inverse of a value or 1/x.
• nth power: Function that calculates the nth power of a value in the
format x ^ power.
• percent: Converts the value to a percent or x/100.
• MC: Clears the memory.
• MR: Recalls the memory value indicated by M in the input field.
• MS: Saves the already computed result into memory.
• M+: Adds the already computed result to the value in memory.
• C: Clears out all the fields.
• <-: Backspace, removes the last entry.
• copy: If the calculator was started from an edit field, it copies the
value back to that field.
• sci: Brings up the scientific calculator.
• +/-: Alternates the value between positive and negative.

Calculate Area

The icon represents the Calculate Area feature

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-19


Calculate

Click an icon to calculate the task:

By Points
Computes the area of a polygon with known vertices.

Hinge
Computes the coordinates of a point, which when
inserted between the starting and ending points of a
pointlist, forms a polygon of a known area.

Line
Computes the coordinates of points, which along with
two known points form a quadrilateral of the known
area.

Comp Area
The Comp Area COGO task computes the area of a polygon with
known vertices.
The Area page contains data needed for the task and a window for the
plot of the polygon:
Point List
Select the name of the Point List, Linework or Area that contains
vertices of the polygon. The name can be entered manually or
selected from the list.
The arrow buttons can be used to modify the order of the points to
obtain the correct shape of the polygon.
Calc
Press to calculate the area of the polygon.
The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:
Area of the polygon in (Job Units) and in acres.
Point List is the list of points constituting the polygon vertices in the
correct order.

7-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

Known Area - Hinge


The Known Area Hinge method computes the coordinates of a point,
which when inserted between the starting and ending points of a point
list, forms a polygon of the known area.
The Area Pages are a wizard that contain the data needed for the task,
the list of points in the selected point list, and a window for the plot of
the point list. The first Area page contains:
PointList
Set the name of the point list. This can be entered or selected from the
Job Point Lists.
List of Points
Displays the list of points in the selected point list along with their
codes. Use the arrow keys to change the order of the points in the list
for this COGO task.
Next
Press to proceed to the next page of the wizard.
The second Area page contains:
Azimuth
Set the known azimuth from the first point in the list, where the hinge
point is located.
Area
Set the area of the polygon in either (JobUnits)^2 or in acres.
Cogo Point
Set the name of the calculated hinge point.
Code
Set the Code and attributes for the calculated hinge point.
Back
Press to go to the previous Area page to modify the pointlist.
Calc
Press to calculate the coordinates of the hinge point.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-21


Calculate

The Results Page shows the results of the calculation:


North is the northing coordinate of the hinge point.
East is the easting coordinate of the hinge point.
Ell Ht is the height of the hinge point.
Total Area of the polygon in (JobUnits) or acres.
Plot Area is the area enclosed by the points in the point lists alone in
(JobUnits) or acres.
Difference is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
against them will be saved.

Known Area - Line


The Known Area Line method computes the coordinates of points,
which along with two known points form a quadrilateral of known
area.
The Area Page contains the data needed for the task:
Start Pt
Set the name of the known starting point. It can be entered manually,
selected from the map or the list of Job Points.
End Pt
Set the name of the known ending point. It can be entered manually,
selected from the map or the list of Job Points.
Az1
Set the azimuth of the line emanating from the start point (Line 1) to
the calculated COGO Pt 1 point.
Az2
Set the azimuth of the line emanating from the end point (Line 2) to
the calculated COGO Pt 2 point.
Area
Set the known area of the quadrilateral in either (Job Units) or acres.
Azimuth/Parallel

7-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

Set the azimuth of the line that will intersect Line1 at COGO Pt 1 and
Line2 at COGO Pt 2 with an area of the quadrilateral equal to the
known area. If Parallel is set, the line COGO Pt 1->COGO Pt 2 will
be parallel to the line defined by the Start and End Points.
Cogo Pt1
Set the name, code, and attributes of the first calculated point.
Cogo Pt2
Set the name, code, and attributes of the second calculated point.
Calc
Press to calculate the coordinates of the two points.
The Results Page shows the following results of the calculation. The
coordinates are displayed for both the computed points:
North is the northing coordinate of one of the two points.
East is the easting coordinate of one of the two points.
Ell Ht is the height of one of the two points.
Area of the quadrilateral in (JobUnits) or acres.
Plot Area is the area enclosed by the points in the point lists alone, in
(JobUnits) or acres.
Difference is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area.
Save
Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

Corner Angle
Calculates the angle between two lines, a start line and an end line,
which have a common mid point.
Start Point
The point that defines the first side of the angle. Enter it manually or
select it from the map or from the list.
Mid Point
The point that defines the corner of the angle. Enter it manually or
select it from the map or from the list.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-23


Calculate

End Point
The point that defines the second side of the angle. Either enter it
manually or select it from the map or from the list.
Calc
Calculates the corner angle.

Calculate Offsets

The icon represents the Calculate Offsets feature.

Click an icon to calculate the task:

Line Offset
Defines a line between two points used for computing
point locations relative to the line.

Curve Offset
Defines a curve (section of an arc) used for computing
point locations in relation to the curve.

Road Offset
Computes point locations relative to the selected road or
alignment.

Line & Offset


The COGO Line & Offset dialog allows you to define a line between
two points used for computing point locations relative to the line.
Start Point
The starting point of the line. The line is defined by its azimuth,
azimuth to another point, or the End point of the line.
End Point/Azimuth
The direction of the line. It can be set through the azimuth of the line
or the ending point of the line.
Ht Comp

7-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

The type of height computations for the computed points. It can be: 
Ht of Start Pt (height of the starting point): The computed points will
have the same height as the starting point of the line.
Interpolate Ht: The height of the computed points will be computed
through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and
ending points of the line.
Num Subs
Designates the number of subdivisions if it is desired to subdivide the
line. For instance a value of 3 indicates that you want to compute four
points by subdividing the line in three equal segments.
Include Transition Points
Whether to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated
station.
SS (Start Station)
The starting station (chainage) of the line.

Curve & Offsets


The Curve & Offsets dialog function allows you to define a curve
(section of an arc) used for computing point locations in relation to
the curve.
PC Point
The Point of Curve; the starting point of the arc.
PT Point
The Point of Tangency; the ending point of the arc.
Radius/ Deg Curve/ Deg Chord
The radius parameters of the curve.
Length/Chord/Tangent/Mid Ord/Extern/Delta
Is the length parameter of the curve.
Num Subs
Designates the number of subdivisions if it is desired to subdivide the
line. For instance a value of 3 indicates that you want to compute four
points by subdividing the line in three equal segments.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-25


Calculate

Include Transition Points


Whether to include transition points if they do not fall on a designated
station.
Turn
Indicates which side the center point of the curve is located.
Ht Comp
The type of height computations for the computed points. Can be: 
Ht of Start Pt (height of the starting point): The computed points will
have the same height as the starting point of the line.
Interpolate Ht: The height of the computed points will be computed
through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and
ending points of the line.
SS
The starting station (chainage) of the line.

Road Offset
The COGO Road Offset dialog allows you to select a road or
alignment used for computing point locations relative to their
selection.
Road/H Alnt/V Alnt
The road or alignment to be used for computing points. This can be
entered manually or chosen from the list.
Start Sta
The starting point of the selected road of alignment, the distance from
the beginning.

Station & Offsets


The COGO Station & Offsets dialog is used to define stationing,
which is used to compute the points location in relation to lines or
curves.
Station

7-26 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

The starting or current station. The two arrows to the right allow you
to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified in the
Station Interval shown in the next line.
Station End
The desired end station if you wish to compute several points. The
two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or increase the station
by the interval specified in the Station Interval shown in the next line.
Interval
The station interval.
Right Offset/Left Offset
The right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line at
the station shown on the Station field.
Up/Down
The Up or Down Height offset with respect to the height of the line at
the station.
Point ID
The name of the current or starting computed point.
Code
The feature code used for the computed points.

Calculate Adjust

The icon represents the Calculate Adjust feature.

Click an icon to calculate the task:

Rotate
Rotates the selected points around a specific point.

Translate
Moves a group of points.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-27


Calculate

Scale
Scales the distances of a range of points relative to a
Base Point.

2D Transform
Performs 2D transformations using a list of point pairs to
get the transformation parameters.

Traverse
Performs traverse adjustments that apply corrections to
the individual latitudes, departures, angles and/or
elevations in order to make them meet given conditions.

Rotate
The Rotate task rotates the selected points around a specific point.
Select points
Select the points for rotation. These points can be chosen from the
map, from the Jobs List, or by entering a Range using the By Range
button.
Rotation Point
Select the point which is to be the center of rotation.
Rotation Method
Select the rotation method by entering a Rotation Angle or by
entering the Old and New Azimuths.
Calc
Rotates the points. The results can be seen through the Edit Points
dialog.

Translate
The Translate task allows you to move a group of points.
Select points

7-28 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

Select the points for translation. These points can be chosen from the
map, from the Jobs List, or by entering a Range using the By Range
button.
Translate By
Select the method for translation. This can be by Coords/Pts or
Az,Dist,Ht.
Coords/Pts: all the selected points will be moved in the same
direction and distance as between the points (locations), set by the
next two fields: From Pt (From Crd) and To Pt (To Crd). In the first
case, define only the point ID, in the second case - the local
coordinates and the height of the location.
Az,Dist,Ht: all the selected points will be moved in the specified
direction by a specified distance. These parameters are set through the
Bearing (Azimuth) field, Hz Dist, and Vert Dist fields.
Calc
Translates the points. The results can be seen through the Edit Points
dialog.

Scale
The Scale task allows you to scale the distances of a range of points
relative to a Base Point.
Select points
Select the points for scaling. These points can be chosen from the
map, from the Jobs List, or by entering a Range using the By Range
button.
Base Pt
Sets the point that is the reference point for the scale transformation.
Scale Factor
The scale factor of the coordinate transformation.
Scale Heights
Check this field if the height values should also be scaled.
Calc

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-29


Calculate

Scales the points. The results can be seen through the Edit Points
dialog.

2D Transform
The 2D Transform dialog contains a list of point pairs used for getting
the transformation parameters.
Add
Select the Add button to enter pairs of points / plane positions.
Edit
Select the Edit button to change an existing point pair.
Delete
Select the Delete button to remove an existing point pair.
Next
Select the Next button to move to the 2D Transform Parameters page.

Traverse Adjustment
Before the result of a traverse can be used to determine its location
from the traverse stations, the traverse must be mathematically
consistent. The misclosures in latitudes, departures, angles and/or
elevations must be adjusted out. The process of applying corrections
to the individual latitudes, departures, angles and/or elevations in
order to make them meet given conditions, is called traverse
adjustment.
Start Point
The station on which the traverse originates.
End Point
The station on which the traverse closes.
Adjust Elevations
Enable this check box to include elevation adjustments if it is needed
to determine elevations in the traverse.
Adjust Sideshots

7-30 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

Enable this check box to include sideshots in adjustments.


Curvature refraction
If you need to consider Earth curvature and atmospheric refraction
corrections, set the value of curvature refraction to 0.14 or 0.20.
Job to store the results
Set the name of the new job where the results of adjusted traverse will
be stored.

Adjustment Close
Sets the methods of traverse adjustment.
Apply Compass Rule
Enable this check box to adjust the traverse by the compass rule.
Apply Angle Balance
Enable this check box to adjust angles in the traverse.
Closing Angle
Shows the closing angle for the traverse adjustment.

Adjustment Results
Adjustment results contain the following information:
• Adjustment methods
• Names of the start and end points of the traverse
• Whether an adjustment of elevations and adjustment of sideshots
are made or not
• Coefficient of refraction
• Path to the new job with the adjusted traverse
• Information about control points
• Original coordinates of a traverse station
• Adjusted coordinates of a traverse station
• Differences between original and adjusted coordinates of a
traverse station (Change)

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-31


Calculate

• Total difference for the traverse station (Linear)


Also, if the Adjust Sideshots option has been chosen:
• Original coordinates of the sideshots
• Adjusted coordinates of the sideshots
• Differences between original and adjusted coordinates of the
sideshots (Change)
• Total difference of the sideshots (Linear)

Point Pair Info


The Point Pair Info dialog selects the pairs of points or coordinates
to obtain transformation parameters.
From Pt/From Crd
Changes the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which
the parameters will be calculated.
To Pt/To Crd
Changes the field to enter either the point or coordinates from which
the parameters will be calculated.

2D Transform Parameters
The 2D Transform Parameters dialog displays the transformation
parameters which will be applied to the set of points needing
transformation.
"From.. To"
Tap the button to select points to transform from the By Range dialog.
Map
Tap the button to select points to transform from the map.
List
Tap the button to select points to transform from a list.
Layer
Tap the button to transform all points from a layer selected in the
Layer dialog.

7-32 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

Back
Returns to the 2D Transform dialog.
Calc
Performs the two dimensional transformation and displays a
successful message.

Traverse Calc
The Traverse Calc task calculates Traverse and Sideshot points, based
on horizontal and Vertical Offsets along a direction which is defined
by an azimuth or right, left or deflection angles.
The Traverse Calc page displays the initial data for the traverse task:
From Point
Set the occupation point (the traverse point). It can be manually
entered, chosen from the map or the list of Job points.
Azimuth/Angle Right/Angle Left/Deflection
Set the azimuth from the known point to the calculated point. The
azimuth can be entered as is, computed from the right or left angles,
or deflection entered in this field and Backsight information.
The angle to the right is the angle at the known point from the
backsight point to the calculated point in a clockwise direction.
The angle to the left is the angle at the known point from the
backsight point to the calculated point in an counter clockwise
direction.
The deflection is the angle at the known point between the
prolongation of the line from the backsight point and the line to the
calculated point.
HD Grd/Gnd
Set the grid or ground horizontal distance along the azimuth line. To
alternate between grid or ground press the button.
Vert Dist
Set the Vertical Distance along the azimuth line.
To Point

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-33


Calculate

Set the name of the calculated point.


Code
Set the code and attributes associated with the calculated point.
BS Point
Press to display the BS Point dialog that allows you to enter the
Backsight Point or Backsight Azimuth. If a BS point has not been
entered, then an Azimuth is required. In this case if an angle value is
entered as Angle Right, Angle Left, or Deflection, this value will be
considered as azimuth.
SideShot
Press to compute the coordinates of the To Point, based on the entered
values for Azimuth/Angle Right/Angle Left/Deflection, Horizontal
and Vertical distances. The From Point does not change, and To Point
is incremented to the next new Point in the database.
Traverse
Press to compute the coordinates of the To Point, based on the entered
values for Azimuth/Angle Right/Angle Left/Deflection, Horizontal
and Vertical distances. The From Point changes to the To Point, and
the To Point changes to the next new name in the database.
The Results page shows the results of the calculation of all the
sideshots of traverse tasks:
North is the northing coordinate of the SideShot/Traverse point.
East is the easting coordinate of the SideShot/Traverse point.
Ell Ht is the height of the SideShot/Traverse point.
From Point of the task.
To Point of the task.
Azimuth from the From Point to the To Point.
Bearing from the From Point to the To Point.
Hz Distance is the horizontal distance between the From Point and
the To Point.
Vert Distance is the vertical distance between the From Point and the
To Point.
Save

7-34 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

Saves the results of the calculation. Only the points with check marks
next to them will be saved.

BS Point
The BS Point dialog allows you to enter the backsight azimuth for the
Traverse task of COGO.
The azimuth can be computed from the Traverse From Point to a
backsight point or can be entered manually.
BS Point/BS Azimuth/
Set the backsight point location or the backsight azimuth. The
backsight point may be entered manually, selected from the map, or
from the list of Job Points.
Code
If a backsight point is entered, the code and string of the point are
displayed.

Calculate DTM

The represents the Calculate DTM feature.

Click an icon to calculate the task:

DTM Volumes
Calculates the cut, fill, and area between two DTMs.

Create DTM
Creates a new DTM.

Contour DTM
Represents DTM data along contour lines.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-35


Calculate

DTM Volumes
To perform volume calculations:
1. In the Final field, select the DTM on which you want the
volume calculations to be performed. Either enter the name of
an existing DTM in the edit field, or press the List selection
button and choose the DTM from the list. When the DTM
selection changes an information message will display the
maximum and minimum Northing and Easting values for the
area covered by the DTM.
2. From the DTM drop-down menu, select one of four options for
volumes calculations.
• If DTM is selected, select another existing DTM. Either
manually enter the name of the second DTM or press the List
selection button and choose the DTM from the list. The plots
will display both of the DTM selected.
• If None is selected, the plot will display only the final DTM.
The plane of projection of the final DTM will be defined as a
flat plane at a fixed elevation of zero.
• If Elevation is selected, the plot will display only the final
DTM. The plane of projection of the final DTM will be
defined as a flat plane at a fixed elevation. Either manually
enter the fixed elevation in the edit field or press the Map or
the List selection button to select a point in the job whose
elevation will be used as the fixed elevation. After the point
selection dialog has closed the edit field will display the
elevation of the selected point.
• If Plane is selected, the plane of projection of the final DTM
will be defined by three separate points. Either manually
enter the names of the three points in the edit fields or use the
associated Map and List selection buttons to select these
points from the job.
3. Press the Calc button to calculate the cut and fill volumes and
projected areas of a DTM to another DTM or a plane of
projection.

7-36 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

When a successful DTM calculation has been performed the Results


tab will display the calculation data. A warning message displays if
any of the fields are empty or contains a name that does not exist.

Creating DTM
Create DTM allows you to create a Topcon tn3 Tin by selecting points
from their job. existing point lists, existing areas, and existing
linework. DTM is a three-dimensional display of transformed
elevation data. DTM describes the topographic surface with a
network of digitized points and optional breaklines.
To create a DTM
1. In the Points/Point List/Linework/Area field, select the
current method of selection of data required to create the DTM.
• For Points, in the Sel Pts drop-down list, choose an option to
select multiple points in the job for creating the DTM:
• All - all the job points.
• By Range - points from a range. More...
• By Code - points of a selected code. More...
• By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
• By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain
distance. More...
• From Map - points selected graphically from the map More...
• From List - points from a list of points. More...
• From Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
• For Point List, press the List selection button and select an
existing point list in the job. More... The list name will appear
in the edit field. The name can also be manually entered into
the edit field and added to the point selection by pressing the
ok button.
• For Linework and Area, press either the Map selection
button and select an existing linework/area from the map
(more...) or press the List selection button and select an
existing linework/area from the list (more...). The name will

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-37


Calculate

appear in the edit field. The name can also be manually


entered into the edit field and added to the point selection by
pressing the ok button.
2. The list will display the points currently selected, and the plot
will display the created DTM.
3. To obtain information about a single point highlighted in the
list, use the Info button.
4. If required, check mark the Include Breaklines box to apply
breaklines and exclusion areas to the DTM. Breaklines are
linear elements that describe changes in smoothness or
continuity of the surface.

NOTICE NOTICE
The points whose feature code is flagged as being a
breakline or exclusion area get applied to the DTM in the
order that they appear in the points list. You can alter the
exclusion areas and breaklines by moving their points up
or down in the list.

5. Click Save to save the DTM created from the selected points in
the DTM folder by default. The default name will be
newTIN.TN3.
6. When a valid DTM has been created, the Results tab displays
the results updated dynamically as you alter the data.
7. The Map tab displays the created DTM as the current selected
points and the triangulation lines.
8. A warning message displays if less than three or no points have
been selected, or there are not enough points to create a DTM
since several have been excluded because their code was
flagged as not to be used in a DTM or they are incomputable in
the current system.
To edit the DTM
1. To view a point on the plot, highlight the point in the list.
2. To see a Map view of the current DTM, double-click in the plot
window.

7-38 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

3. To delete any point from the DTM:


• Highlight the point in the list.
• Click the Delete button. The DTM will be updated.
4. To alter the boundary of the currently selected DTM:
• Press the Edit Boundary button. Find out more...
Icons you can use
MAGNET Field general buttons and icons are described here...

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-39


Calculate

General Icons
The Delete button is used to delete the selected points in
the points list.

The Info button is used to display information on a


single point highlighted in the list.

The Up (and Down ) arrow button is used to


move the selected points up (and down) in the list
control. If the current selection is at the top or bottom or
nothing is selected, the buttons will be disabled
accordingly.

The Plot button is used to hide and show the plot


window.

The Arrow control button allows you to use the keyboard


arrow keys to move points inside the list.

Opens the list of points.

Opens a map.

Confirms settings, closes the dialog, and returns to the


previous dialog.

Editing Boundary
The boundary selection dialog contains a list of points, which bound
the DTM (the general plot of the DTM with the boundary in red).
To edit the boundary:

7-40 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Calculator

1. If required, move points up and down the list to change the


order of the boundary. The DTM will be updated to reflect the
changes to the point order.
2. To delete a point from the boundary, highlight the point in the
list and click the red minus icon. The DTM will be updated.
3. Use the Map or List selection button to select points from all of
the points in the DTM to add to the boundary.

NOTICE NOTICE
When you select a point in the boundary Map selection
dialog the point is added between the end points of the
segment which is closest to the selected point. After each
selection the DTM gets updated to show your
selection. When you return to the Edit Boundary dialog, the
point list gets updated to the order of the boundary in the
map.

Find out the description of the icons on the dialog here...

Contouring DTM
This dialog allows you to contour an existing Topcon TN3 TIN.
Contouring DTM is a method of transforming elevation data into a
contoured surface, representing data along contour lines.
To create the contours on the DTM:
1. Enter the DTM Name manually in the edit field, or press the
List selection button to select an existing DTM from the list.
2. The plot window will display the currently selected DTM.
3. Press the Next button to set the parameters required for
contouring the DTM.
4. Enter a Contour Interval between the contour lines in the edit
field as required. The Contour line interval must be greater than
0.001m. The difference between the start and end elevations is
divided by the interval to get the number of contour lines.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 7-41


Calculate

5. The Start Elevation edit field initially shows the lowest


elevation in the selected DTM. If required, you can enter a
different value.
6. The End Elevation edit field initially shows the highest
elevation in the selected DTM. If required, you can enter a
different value.
7. Press the Save button to store the contoured DTM and generate
the contour lines in the job. The lines will be added to the job as
lines with the DTM name and an integer value starting at 1,
which makes the line unique.
The results of contouring will be displayed on the Results tab.
The Map tab will display the currently selected DTM as well as the
contour lines in red.

7-42 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 8

Map

Map
The Map screen displays the plot of the current job, the viewing tools,
and the scale. The Map maintains the scale after changing the status
of the main map.
Click a tool icon to execute the command:

Zoom In
Zooms the plot inwards.

Zoom Out
Zooms the plot outwards.

Zoom Window
Selects a frame of objects for zoom-in display; draw
from left to right to get the object you want.

Zoom All
Displays all objects in the job.

Zoom By Point
Selects a point to center the plot.

Properties
Selects the map properties to display. Also, pressing and
holding the stylus on the map area displays the Map
Properties option.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 8-1


Map

The Main Map allows you to edit job data and to stakeout desired
objects. On the Main Map, tap the object to highlight it. Hold the
stylus on the selected object until a pop-up menu displays. The menu
options depend on the object selected. Use the appropriate item from
the pop-up menu.

Map Properties
The Map Properties dialog allows you to:
• Customize the map view
• Add to the points
• Show the point properties (names, codes, heights, etc.)
• Display the Auto Topo points
To enable display the points, place a check mark in the Show Points
field. Along with the points their names, codes, icons, heights, auto
topo and/or scanned points can be displayed.
Also, it is possible to display roads, their stations and templates,
lines, their stations and start each time from the current position.
Selecting the Current Position check box enables the current
position to automatically snap back to the center if it moves off the
edge of the map.

Zoom In/Out/Window
To customize the display, click View->Zoom In, View->Zoom Out,
or View->Zoom Window to zoom the plot inwards or outwards, or to
select an area to center on.

Zoom All
To view all objects in the map, click View->Zoom All.

Zoom By Point
To select a point for centering, click View->Zoom By Point and
choose the point in the Select point dialog.

8-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Map

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 8-3


Map

Notes:

8-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 9

Connections

Connections
This dialog allows you to perform the following tasks:
1. To select a device type and a configuration style to work at the
site.
Find out more...Device connection
2. To enable a connection prompt upon starting the job.
Find out more...Device connection
3. To connect with MAGNET Enterprise web-server and the
project for data exchange.
Find out more...Enterprise Connection
4. To enable automatic connection with the network server.
Find out more...Network connection
To enable automatic disconnection with the network server.
Find out more...Network connection

General Connection Settings


The General tab of the Connections dialog allows you to change the
type of the device to work and to select a job configuration before
connecting to the device.
GPS
Select the GPS type of instrument and the configuration to work in
the current job.
Optical
Select the Optical type of instrument and the configuration to work in
the current job.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 9-1


Connections

Prompt at startup
Unchecking this box will prevent the program from connecting to an
instrument until you click the Connections icon on the main folder or
enter a Survey or Stakeout dialog; however, the Network settings will
be available. You can also set a prompt for connection at startup in the
Global dialog.
Connect/Disconnect
Clicking this button initiates the connection to the instrument
associated with the currently selected configuration or close
communication, respectively. Find out more about Bluetooth
connections.

Bluetooth
Device Discovery
The Select Bluetooth Device dialog lists all visible Bluetooth
Devices.
Each device's name is displayed. If the name cannot be resolved, the
Bluetooth Unique Address is displayed instead. Type of device and its
services are displayed if the device provides this information.
The dialog title displays the type of device that application tries to
connect to.
If a device is not present in the list or some devices did not report their
names in a timely manner, try refreshing the list using the Refresh
button. If the device is still not listed, then the distance to it can be too
large or the device can be connected to a different controller.
Connection with the device is possible even if its name was not
resolved and only the Bluetooth Unique Address is listed.
The Select button will initiate authentication with the device.
If Bluetooth hardware is disabled (powered off) or the controller has
an unsupported Bluetooth stack, a warning will be displayed.
Currently, only the Microsoft Bluetooth stack is supported.

9-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Connections

Authentication
The application maintains authentication information independently
of the Bluetooth UI in the operating system. There is no need to pair
devices beforehand, because the application will perform the pairing.
The application supports connections with devices that do not require
a PIN code. To use this feature, uncheck the Require PIN check box.
If the PIN code is provided and a connection is successful, the
application will store the PIN code in a protected area for future use.
Press the Connect button to initiate a connection.
If a connection succeeds, the Bluetooth Unique Address and its
authentication will be stored. Next time the application will not
display the Device Discovery.

Bluetooth Connection
When the application tries to establish a connection with the
Bluetooth port, it displays the Accessing Bluetooth Device dialog.
The title of the dialog displays the type of device that the application
tries to connect to.
If a connection cannot be established in a timely manner, the dialog
will automatically stop the connection. A connection can be cancelled
manually and with the Cancel button.
It is possible to initiate the Device Discovery procedure using the
Change Device button. Also, the device discovery can be initiated by
clearing the Connect to the last BT device check box before
connecting.

Enterprise Connection
The Enterprise tab allows you to establish a connection with an
enterprise project:
• Enter your Login information to connect to the Magnet Enterprise
server.
• Select a project from the Connect to project drop-down list. You
can create a new project using the nearby icon.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 9-3


Connections

• Click Connect to establish the connection. Connection status


displays the result.

Network Connection Settings


The Network tab allows you to manage an automatic connection of
the modem to the NTRIP server for Internal CDMA and GPRS
modems.
Auto-Connect
When this box is checked, an automatic connection of the modem is
enabled. After clicking the back button, the Network tab will display
the process of the connection. Find out more: Connection to Network.
If automatic connection is disabled in the Connections dialog, you
can configure the modem from the Status or Topo screens.
Check signal quality
When this check box is selected, the signal quality is displayed on the
Signal bar.
Auto-Disconnect
When this check box is selected, an automatic disconnection and
switching off the modem is enabled on exiting MAGNET Field.

9-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 10

Setting Up GPS Survey

Setup folder
Before conducting the survey you may need to perform some
preliminary work that depends upon the current job configuration.

Setup GPS folder


Click an icon to perform the task:

Localization
Calculates localization parameters of the mathematical
coordinate transformation between an original
coordinate system, in which the job points are measured
or given, and a local coordinate system, in which control
points are known. Find out more...

Start Base
Sets the Base Receiver in RTK survey.

Status
Displays information about the current position of the
GNSS receiver, RTK status, and the satellite
constellation.

Known Pt Init
Initializes the receiver using known coordinates for the
Rover station.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-1


Setting Up GPS Survey

mmGPS Init
Sets up mmGPS+ system for RTK surveying.

Static Occupation
Starts logging data at the point occupied for static
observations in PP Static survey.

Simulator
Sets initial WGS84 position for GPS simulation.

Status
This allows you to check the status of a GPS+ survey. The Status
dialog contains information about the current position of the receiver,
RTK status, and the satellite constellation.
Position
System
Log History
Multi Base Status
Scatter Plot
SVs

Position
Position page displays:
• Total number of the available satellites. The lock icon signifies
the number of the satellites tracked, and the star icon shows the
number of satellites used in position determination.
• Current UTC time.
• Coordinates of the position in the selected coordinate system and
units.
• PDOP value; it is a factor depending solely on satellite geometry
describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates will depend on

10-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Status

the measurement errors. PDOP is proportional to the estimated


position uncertainty.
• H and V stand for HRMS and VRMS, the RMS values of the
horizontal and vertical coordinates, respectively.
• Base Dist: slope distance to base antenna. The field is empty if no
differential corrections are received.
Settings opens the dialog where Elevation Mask or Base Make At
Rover parameter can be changed.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
System
Log History
Multi Base Status
Scatter Plot
SVs

The icon opens a pop-up menu which varies depending on


the configuration type used. More...

Status pop-up menu


The pop-up menu can contain a different set of the following options
depending on the configuration type used
Rover Antenna Setup
Config Radio
Config OmniSTAR
Config Beacon
Config RE-S1 Repeater
Reset RTK or Reset DGPS - the command that reinitializes the
receiver.
mmGPS+ Options
Mission Planning

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-3


Setting Up GPS Survey

Clear NVRAM - the command that resets the receiver parameters to


factory default values (such as active antenna input, elevation mask
and recording interval, and information about the receiver's internal
file system). This command will not delete any files from the receiver
memory. After clearing the NVRAM, the receiver will require some
time to collect new ephemerides and almanacs (around 15 minutes).

System
Open the System page to view the information about the current state
of the RTK measurements:
• Position Type - Indicates the solution type of the position.
• Common Sats - Number of common satellites between the base
and rover.
• Initialized Sats -Number of satellites initialized.
• Radio Link -Quality of the radio link.
• RTK Age - Age of the last RTK message in seconds.
• Receiver Memory (KB) - Available memory in the receiver for
storing TPS files.
• Receiver Power(%) - Percentage of receiver power remaining.
• Controller Memory (KB) - Available memory in the controller.
• Controller Power(%) - Percentage of controller power remaining.
• NetRTK (MAC) Status - Applies to Network RTK style with
MAC corrections selected. Will display 'Yes' if MAC is used for
position computation.
• Base Make at Rover - Requires Topcon receiver f/w at rover 3.4
or higher. If Automatic detection of Base Make is selected in
style settings, this field will report the Base Make that was
detected by the Rover receiver. If the Base receiver does not
support IGS Class extensions to correction formats or if the
required RTCM messages were not enabled on the base, this field
will report a dash (-), and the rover will apply default GLONASS
corrections. You can override this by pressing the Settings button

10-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Status

in the Status dialog or in the Styles Settings (Advanced). No Base


Make At Rover will be reported by MAGNET Field in this mode.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
Position
Log History
Multi Base Status
Scatter Plot
SVs

Solution type
Possible solution types:
• No Solution - receiver cannot produce a solution (not enough
satellites or incorrect antenna model)
• Autonomous (Standalone)
• DGPS (Code-differential)
• Float
• Fixed (RTK)
• HP DGPS - High-Precision Omnistar solution
• DGPS(VBS) - indicates DGPS solution produced using code-
differential corrections received from an Omnistar satellite

TIP TIP
mmGPS+ solution marker indicates that solution was
produced using mmGPS+ technology

Log History
If the Log History is available, a Log History tab is displayed.
The Log History tab graphically displays the usage of satellites over
time. For convenience, the field is divided into 5-minute portions

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-5


Setting Up GPS Survey

along dotted lines. The starting time and next half hour is marked
with time labels.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
Position
System
Multi Base Status
Scatter Plot
SVs

Multi Base Status


The Multi Base Status page displays the information about the current
state of the RTK measurements in the multiple base configuration.
RTK - Use: a check mark indicates this base station is currently used
by the RTK engine.
RTK - ID: the numerical ID of this base station.
RTK - Base: the name of this base station. (Only available if this base
is currently in use)
RTK - Age: the age of the last RTK message received by this base
station.
RTK - Link: the quality of the radio link of this base station.
RTK - Type: Indicated the solution type of the position (only
available if this base is currently in use)
RTK - Dist: the distance between this base station and the rover.
(Only available if this base is currently in use)
Other pages in the Status dialog:
Position
System
Log History
Scatter Plot
SVs

10-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Status

Scatter Plot
The Scatter Plots tab displays the current receiver position changing
in time: either the current receiver vertical position or the horizontal
position relative to the position in a local (northing, easting)
coordinate system.
The buttons on the left of the plot are used to switch between
horizontal and vertical plots, to zoom in and out, and to open
properties.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
Position
System
Log History
Multi Base Status
SVs

SVs
The SVs page of the Status dialog displays a graphical representation
of the position of the satellites on the sky or the S/N ratios.
Show GPS
Shows/hides the GPS satellites images.
Show GLNS
Shows/hides the GLNS satellites images. GLNS satellites are \marked
with the "+" sign.
SNR/Skyplot
Toggles the appearance of the dialog to the skyplot or the signal-to-
noise ratio for the satellites.
List/Plot
Toggles the appearance of the dialog between the graphical
representation to the table displaying the satellites parameters:
PRN: shows the number of the satellite
H/U: shows whether the satellite is healthy or unhealthy

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-7


Setting Up GPS Survey

EL: shows the elevation angle of the satellite


AZ: shows the azimuth of the satellite
SNR1: L1 signal to noise ratio
SNR2: L2 signal to noise ratio
USED: shows whether the satellite is used in position computation.
You can select whether a satellite should be used or not by selecting
the corresponding row for the satellite in the list and clicking on the
USED column header. This will toggle the use of the satellite.
Other pages in the Status dialog:
Position
System
Log History
Multi Base Status
Scatter Plot

Mission Planning
The Mission Planning option enables you to examine the expected
observation conditions (such as satellite visibility and PDOP). This
can be done in order to find out the best timing for observations at the
specified point.
To perform mission planning:
1. Select Setup / Status and the Mission Planning option from the
pop-up menu.
2. Configure settings for observations in the Mission Planning
Setting dialog. More...
3. Once the Mission Planning Setting dialog is closed the Mission
Planning dialog will calculate and show the position of
satellites in the first 10 minutes of the specified time on the Sky
Plot (the celestial sphere).
4. The Local field displays the date and time (local time) of the
calculation result.

10-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Status

5. The dialog also provides information about the given position


as applied to the calculations, the PDOP value, and the number
of GPS and GLONASS.
6. If required, you can hide all the GPS or GLONASS satellites
from the view. To do this, uncheck the corresponding box.
7. Use the appropriate button to calculate and show the satellites
every 10 minutes of the specified time:
8. Press > or < to move forward or backward, respectively
9. Press I< to return to the start time
10. Press II to pause at any 10-minute interval
11. To view different graphical satellite information, select a
desired option from the drop-down selection list:
Sky Plot
Sat List
Sat Num
PDOP

Mission Planning Setting


To configure settings for Mission Planning:
1. Enter the coordinates of the current position in one of the two
possible ways

• automatically by clicking
• manually in the current coordinate system after clicking

2. Select the Date, Start, and End Time of observations as


required.
3. If required, change the Elevation Mask from the default 15
degrees for a desired value.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-9


Setting Up GPS Survey

Satellite List
The Satellite List option allows you to view graphically the
availability of either GPS or GLONASS satellites changing in the
specified time.

Satellite Number
The Satellite Number option allows you to view graphically the total
number of GPS and GLONASS satellites changing in the specified
time.

PDOP
The PDOP option allows you to view graphically the PDOP value
changing in the specified time.

Start Base
The Start Base dialog contains information about the Base receiver
and can be used for setting the Base Receiver.
Point
Enter the name of the point where the Base receiver is located. It can
be entered or chosen from the map or the list of the job points.
Coordinates
The coordinates of the base position in the selected coordinate
system.
Auto Pos
Enables you to measure the position of the current point. Once
pressed, the button changes its name to Stop. Press it to stop logging
the position. The average coordinates will be displayed. The Pos field
appears and shows the number of the measurements used for
averaging.
Ant Ht

10-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Start Base

The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of


measurement.
Start Base
Sets the receiver as a Base transmitting the selected coordinates.

The icon opens a pop-up menu of the following options.


More...

Multi Base
The Multi Base dialog sets the multi base mode for the RTK survey.
Base Station ID
The identifying number of the base, which is sent as part of the
CMR+ messages. Each base in a network must have a unique ID.
Transmit Delay
Signal transmission delay from the current base. This parameter is set
to ensure that the radio signals from multiple bases do not overlap.
Each base should be set at least 250 milliseconds apart from any
other. (At least 500 milliseconds for data transfer rates less than 9600
bps.)
Use Multi Base
Enables multi base mode for surveying.

Start Base pop-up menu


The pop-up menu can contain the following options:
Status
Config Radio depends on the configuration for the survey
Multi Base

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-11


Setting Up GPS Survey

Static Occupation
The Static Occupation dialog allows the configuration of the receiver
for a Post-Processed static occupation of the survey marker.
Point
Enter the name of the point where the static receiver is located. It can
be chosen from the map or the list of the job points, or can be entered
manually.
Code
The code you want assigned to the point. It will be included in the raw
GPS data file.
Ant Ht
The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of
measurement.
Duration
The length of time you want the receiver to log data to the raw GPS
data file.
Start Occ
This button starts the logging of epochs into the raw GPS data file.

Localization
The Localization is used for transformation of the coordinates
between a local (ground) system and other (WGS84) system, in
which the job points are measured.
The Localization dialog contains a list of points used for localization.
These are called control points. Their coordinates are known in both
systems: local ("Known Point") and job coordinate system
("Measured Point"). Each point has a level of reliability specified

10-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization

with the values of the residuals along the horizontal and the vertical
axes and the Control parameters that shows the status of the point.
Type
Allows you to select the type of Localization (by the job coordinate
system). The WGS84 selection is always available. Datum or Grid
selections are available only if you selected a specific coordinate
system in the Coordinate System dialog before visiting the
Localization dialog. On Localization dialog it is possible to change
the Localization type after control points were added.
Add
Opens the Localization Point dialog for adding control points.
Edit
Opens the Localization Point dialog to change the control point
added.
Remove
Removes the highlighted points.
Details
Opens the Localization Results dialog.
Settings
Opens the Survey parameters dialog.
Related tasks:
• Basic Concept of Localization
• Localization with Stereographic Projection on WGS84
• Localization with Stereographic Projection on any Datum
• Localization with any Predefined or Created Projection
• One-point Localization
• Two-point Localization
• Three-point Localization
• Performing Localization
• Importing Localization Data to Other Job

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-13


Setting Up GPS Survey

Add Localization Point


The Add Localization Point dialog contains the coordinates of the
control point added to localization.
Known Point
The Known Point field contains the coordinates of the point in the
local (ground) coordinate system.
Point: sets the name of the control point. You can enter a new point,
select a point from the map or from the list.
Use Horizontal: specifies that a point should be used for the
horizontal localization.
Use Vertical: set if the point should be used for the vertical
localization.
Measured Point
The Measured Point field contains the coordinates of the control point
in the coordinate system that is set for the current job. When
computing localization parameters these coordinates will be
transformed to the local system. The type of transformation can be
selected in Localization dialog.
Point: Sets the name of the control point. You can enter a new point,
select a point from the map or from the list.
Start Meas: Sets the control point to the current location. The Epoch
Count field shows the number of the accepted epochs. The parameters
of the logging are set through the Survey Parameters dialog. If a point
with the same name already exists, the application will open the Point
Check notification dialog. You can overwrite, rename, or store the
point as a check point.
OK: Saves the point and returns to the Localization dialog with a
newly added point.

Localization Results
The Localization Results dialog contains the calculated parameters of
the localization: the global coordinates (Lat0, Lon0, h0), the
corresponding local coordinates (N0, E0, Elev0), the scale parameter

10-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Simulator

(Scale), the rotation parameter (Az) and the plane slope angles
corresponding to north and east directions.

Simulator
Allows you to setup the initial WGS84 position for GPS simulation.
If simulation moving speed is not zero, the current position starts to
drift immediately. The current position is remembered between
TopSURV runs.
Moving speed and direction can be changed in the main map or in the
Topo dialog using arrows.

Known Point Initialization


The Known Point Initialization is used to initialize the receiver using
the known coordinates for the Rover station. It is optionally used with
single frequency receivers and for quality control on dual frequency
receivers. By default, this option is absent in the menu. To show it,

from the Home menu, click and then . More...


Point
Enter the name of the point where the Base receiver is located. It can
be entered or chosen from the map or the list of job points.
Coordinates
The coordinates of the rover position in the selected coordinate
system.
Ant Ht
The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of
measurement.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-15


Setting Up GPS Survey

Initialize
Initialized the receiver as a rover with the specified coordinates of
KPI Position.

KPI Position
The Position page displays:
• The total number of the available satellites. The lock icon
signifies the number of tracked satellites. The star icon shows the
number of satellites used in position determination.
• The current UTC time.
• The Residuals.
• The PDOP value; it is a factor depending solely on satellite
geometry describing how the uncertainty in the coordinates will
depend on the measurement errors. PDOP is proportional to the
estimated position uncertainty.
• H and V stand for HRMS and VRMS, which are the RMS values
of the horizontal and vertical coordinates, respectively.
• KPR Status: Shows if it is Initializing or Initialized.

mmGPS Initialization
The Init mmGPS+ dialog contains information about the calibration
of the laser transmitter and initialization of the sensor.
Transmitter Data
Transmitter Position
Sensor

The icon in the upper-left corner of the dialog displays a pop-


up menu of the following items:

10-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


mmGPS Initialization

• Field Calibration: Opens the Calibration dialog to set the


transmitter to calibrate (i.e. to fix errors in incline in the self-
leveling mechanism of the transmitter).
• Known Point Offset: Opens the Known Point Offset dialog.

Transmitter Position
The Trans Pos tab allows you to set up the transmitter's height and
location at the job site.
The List contains the following items:
Name: The name of the transmitter.
ID: The channel of the transmitter.
Point: The point over which the transmitter is setup.
Resect
Opens the Resect dialog to perform resection for an unknown
transmitter location.
Edit
Opens the Known Point dialog to select the point over which the
transmitter is setup.
Delete
Removes the transmitter from the list.
The bitmap in the upper-left corner of the dialog displays a floating
menu of the following items:
Field Calibration: Opens the Calibration dialog to set the transmitter
to calibrate (i.e. to fix errors in incline in the self-leveling mechanism
of the transmitter).
Known Point Offset: Opens the Known Point Offset dialog.

Transmitter Position
The Trans Pos tab allows you to set up the transmitter's height and
location at the job site.
The List contains the following items:
Name: The name of the transmitter.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-17


Setting Up GPS Survey

ID: The channel of the transmitter.


Point: The point over which the transmitter is setup.
Resect
Opens the Resect dialog to perform resection for an unknown
transmitter location.
Edit
Opens the Known Point dialog to select the point over which the
transmitter is setup.
Delete
Removes the transmitter from the list.

Sensor
The Sensor tab uploads transmitter calibration information to the
sensor and sets up the sensor for receiving the transmitter's laser
beam.
Receiver Port
The receiver port that connects the receiver and sensor.
Transmitter ID
The transmitter's channel. The ANY selection will allow the sensor to
independently select the transmitter with the smallest error rate.
Sensor Gain
Sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitter's laser beam.
Init Time Improvement
Check this box to improve the RTK fix time for the receiver.
Init Sensor
Starts the initialization process.

Resect mmGps+ Resect


The Resect tab is used to perform the resection calculation from the
rover point to the point over which the transmitter is set.

10-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


mmGPS Initialization

The upper-right corner of the dialog displays information about the


current state of measurement:
The mmGPS icon displays the sensor that receives the transmitter's
beam.
The quality of the radio link.
The type of the position calculation method.
The RMS errors for horizontal and vertical coordinates, respectively.
The number of the satellites tracked and used in position calculation,
respectively.
Meas
The number of measurement.
Known Point
Enable this when occupying a known point, and select a point to
occupy using the map and list buttons.
Ht
The antenna's height and method of height measurement.
Start
Starts the measurement process. After pressing, the button changes
the name to Stop, and the counter of the epochs collected appears.
Logging
Displays the number of GPS epochs used in the resection calculation
during the measurement.

Resect mmGps+ Sensor


The Resect dialog is used to measure an unknown transmitter location
using the rover and three or more points. The Sensor tab is similar to
the Sensor tab on the Init mmGPS+ dialog and used to set up the
sensor.
Receiver Port
Sets the receiver port that connects the receiver and sensor.
Transmitter ID
Displays the channel of the transmitter.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-19


Setting Up GPS Survey

Sensor Gain
Sets the sensitivity of the sensor to the transmitter's laser beam.
Init Sensor
Starts the initialization of the sensor.
Init Time Improvement
Select to improve the RTK fix time for the receiver.
Known Trans Horz Pos
If selected, then after pressing the Init Sensor button, the Known
Point dialog displays. Select the point over which the transmitter is
setup.

Data
The Data tab is used to view the results of resection measurements.
Data will display only after three or more points have been measured.
Re-Meas
Clears all data and restarts the resection process.
Accept
Opens the Add Point dialog to view the point information for the
transmitter.

Transmitter
The Transmitter dialog sets the transmitter parameters.
Name
The name of the transmitter.
Com Port
The communication port of the controller used to connect to the
transmitter.
ID
The channel of the transmitter.

10-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


mmGPS Initialization

Calibration Data
The status of calibration data.
Clear Data
Clear the ID and Calibration Data fields.
Get Data
Retrieves the transmitter's data.

Field Calibration
The Field Calibration dialog selects the transmitter for field
calibration.
Transmitter Name
The name of the transmitter to calibrate.

Update Calibration Data


The Update Calibration Data dialog will be displayed after
performing Field Calibration if it is determined that the transmitter
leveling offsets need to be adjusted.
Com Port
The communication port of the controller used to connect to the
transmitter.
Update Data
Sends the offset info to the transmitter.

Known Point
The Known Point dialog is used to select the known point over which
the transmitter is setup and enter the transmitter height.
Point
The point the transmitter is installed over. It can be selected using the
map or list buttons.
Transmitter

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-21


Setting Up GPS Survey

Name
Displays the name of the transmitter.
ID
Displays the transmitter's channel.
Ht
Sets the height of the transmitter from the ground to the mark on the
transmitter's side and the method of height measurement in the
specified units.
2m Fixed Tripod
This box can be checked if using a 2 meter fixed tripod.

Known Point Offset


The Known Point Offset is used to compute the height offset between
the rover and a currently occupied known point. This can be used as
an adjustment for the transmitter height.
Transmitter Name
Displays the name of the transmitter.
Point
The point to be occupied. It can be selected using the map or list
buttons.
Height Offset
Displays the difference in height between the known measurement
and the current rover measurement.
Epoch Count
Displays the number of GPS epochs used in the measurement.
Start
Starts the measurement process. After pressing, the button changes its
name on Stop, and the counter of the epochs collected appears.

10-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


mmGPS Initialization

mmGPS+ Options
The mmGPS+ Options dialog allows modification of various
mmGPS+ functions. The current status of the receiver's mmGPS+
engine is displayed as ON, OFF or DISABLED. You can change the
status by using the combo box to turn the mmGPS+ engine ON or
OFF.
Use weighted height computations
The mmGPS+ height can be computed using weights for the laser and
GPS data. When this box is checked, a greater weight is applied to the
laser measurement when the rover is closer to the transmitter or to the
GPS measurement when the rover is further away.
Height Difference Limit
Set a limit for the difference between GPS and mmGPS+ height
measurements. The mmGPS+ icon will change if the difference is
over this limit.

Settings
Elevation mask sets the parameter rejecting low-elevation satellites
while positioning.
Canopy Environment check box instructs the RTK engine to use
less rigid thresholds when filtering out measurement outliers. This
mode is recommended when working under a tree canopy or in other
cases of high multipath.
Base Make at Rover allows you to designate Base Make (IGS Class)
used by the Rover receiver to account for GLONASS biases. This also
allows you to override Base Make automatically detected by the
Rover receiver if this information is transmitted by the Base.

NOTICE NOTICE
If the receiver is connected, the settings are applied upon
closing the dialog.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-23


Setting Up GPS Survey

Sessions
The Sessions dialog allows you to configure and edit automatic
surveys and install them into TPS receivers. The receivers can each be
given a descriptive name and added to a list, easing the task of
controlling multiple-receiver surveys.
The 'X' Buttons
The left hand button can be used to remove a Session survey
configuration from the Sessions list. The right hand button can be
used to remove a receiver from the Receiver list.
The '->' Button
Use this button to add a Session survey configuration to a receiver in
the Receivers list.
The 'Add' Buttons
The left hand button opens the Session Setup dialog in which you
enter or edit the Session survey configurations. The right hand button
allows the addition of a new receiver to the Receivers list.

Sessions
The Sessions dialog is accessed through the export menu item. It
allows you to import automatic surveys from TPS receivers into the
controller.
Refresh
This button refreshes the active sessions list from the current receiver.
Export
This button sends the selected session to the receiver.

10-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Sessions

Session Setup
Session setup allows you to program a session which can then be
loaded into the receiver to automatically start logging data at a
specific date and time, and whether the antenna is static or roving.
Site Name
The name of the site where the receiver will be placed for the survey.
Type
Type of survey, either static or kinematic.
Start Time
The day of week and the local time that the receiver will start the
survey.
End Time
The day of week and the local time that the receiver will end the
survey.
Interval
The time between successive epochs logged to the raw data file.
Min SVs
The minimum number of SVs to use when logging an epoch. Epochs
containing fewer satellites will not be logged to the raw data file.
Ant Ht
The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of
measurement.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 10-25


Setting Up GPS Survey

Notes:

10-26 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 11

GPS Survey

Survey Folder
Survey types depend upon the current job configuration.

Survey GPS
Click an icon to start the desired survey:

Topo
Conducts a survey with GPS static points and determine
inaccessible points by setting offsets from measured
points: Offset Line, Azimuth & Offset and Offset Laser. 
Find out more on Offsets.

Auto Topo
Conducts a survey with GPS dynamic points.

X-Section
Performs a survey of a road cross-section.

Find Station
Identifies the station by the distance, computed to the
station, and the offset from the road.

Tape Dimentions
Calculates the periphery of structures using tape
measurements, relative to the two known points that
belong to one side of the structure.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 11-1


GPS Survey

Topo
The Topo dialog enables you to initiate a static survey.
The Topo page contains the initial data for the survey and displays the
progress of the survey. In the upper right corner of the dialog the
information about the receiver operation is located. It duplicates the
information on the Status dialog.
Point
Displays the name of the point to be logged.
Code
Displays the code for the point. Pressing the "..." button in the Code
field displays the menu:
String: switches on the String field on the Topo tab. String is a
specifying parameter for a code that allows you to group the objects
with one code according to some specified attribute. For example, the
code "Pole" also has the "Jones'" string. Processing the points, you
will be able to select only the poles of Jones' and will not take into
consideration all the other poles. Multiple Codes: opens the Multiple
Code Strings dialog. Control Code: opens the Control code dialog.
Note: opens the Notes dialog.
Ant Ht
The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of
measurement.
Epoch count
Shows the number of the epochs used in averaging the position.
Start
Starts the survey process. After pressing the button, the name changes
to Accept and a new button Cancel appears along with the count of
the epochs achieved. The point is automatically saved if it meets the
criteria for Logging the point as specified in Settings.
Start Log (present for the survey modes that include PP)
Starts Raw data logging into the receiver.
Settings

11-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Auto Topo

Opens the Survey Parameters dialog.

Data
The Topo-Data page contains the information of the base and the last
point that has been logged since this dialog was opened.

Map
The Map tab shows the stored points graphically. All the survey
process can be done through this page as well. It contains the
information similar to the Topo dialog.

Auto Topo
The Auto Topo dialog enables you to initiate a dynamic survey. The
Auto Topo page contains the initial data for the survey and displays
the progress of the survey. In the upper right corner of the dialog the
information about the receiver operation is located.
Point
Displays the name of the point to be logged.
Code
Displays the code for the point. Pressing the "..." button in the Code
field displays the menu:
String: switches on the String field on the Topo tab. (Also the "&"
sign appears indicating string) String is a specifying parameter for a
code that allows you to group the objects with one code according to
some specified attribute. For example, the code "Pole" also has the
"Jones'" string. Processing the points, you will be able to select only
the poles of Jones' and will not take into consideration all the other
poles. Multiple Codes: opens the Multiple Code Strings dialog.
Control Code: opens the Control code dialog. Note: opens the Notes
dialog.
Ant Ht

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 11-3


GPS Survey

The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of


measurement.
Log Now
Stores the current position of the receiver antenna.
Pause
Interrupts the survey. After pressing this button, the button changes its
name to Resume.
Start
Starts the survey process. After pressing this button, the button
changes its name to Stop and the Pause button becomes available.
Start Log (PP DGPS and PP Kinematic modes)
Starts Raw data logging into the receiver.
Settings
Opens the Survey Parameters dialog.

Raw Data
Lists all the coordinates/measurement information of the selected raw
data record.

Raw Gps+
All the raw data collected is displayed in a list on this dialog. When a
line is selected, the column titles reflect the data in that line. Double
click on a line to see the Data in a separate dialog.
The Coordinates of the Base are displayed and the vectors to the base
from the rover of the collected points. The vectors are only displayed
for the points collected with fixed solutions.
First
Moves the cursor to the first observation in the raw data.
Last
Moves the cursor to the last observation in the raw data.
Add Notes

11-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Cross Section

Displays a dialog to enter additional notes for an observed point.


Find by Point
Finds a point by its name or a part of the name.
Find by Code
Finds a point by its code.
Find Next
Finds the next point in the list that satisfies the same conditions as the
previous Find.

GPS Offsets
The Offsets tab allows you to set the offset point for the measurement.
Line
Opens the Line dialog to define a point set by the offset from a line.
Az Dis Ht
Opens the Azimuth-Distance-Height dialog to define a point set by
the offset from a point.
Laser
Present if Laser has been selected in the Configuration. Opens the
Laser dialog for measurements to define a point.

Cross Section
The Cross-Section task allows you to perform the survey of the cross
section. To start working, select the Survey->X-Section menu. The
Cross Section dialog contains the settings of the station, where the
cross section survey is to be performed if a Road is selected.
Road
Enter the name of the Road manually or select the road from the list.
Cl Code:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 11-5


GPS Survey

Enter the code and attributes of the center line points. Insert manually,
or select one from the drop-down list.
Station/Chainage
Sets the station where the cross section is surveyed. This field is
shown only if the road is set.
Interval
The increment of distance toward the next station. This field is shown
only if the road is set.

Cross Section
This dialog appears only if a Road has not been selected for the cross
section.
Station/Chainage
Enter the Station/Chainage for the recorded cross section.

Find Station
The Measurement tab of the Find Station dialog is used for the
identification of the station by computing the distance from the
beginning of the road to the projection of the station to the road, and
the offset of the station from the center line of the road.
Road
Type the name for the road or select it from the list.
Point
The name of the point to Find Station for or to store after taking a
measurement.
Code
The code and attributes of the Point. Code can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
Ant Ht

11-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Tape Dimension

Enter the height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the mark.
Also the measurement type for the height needs to be specified: slant
or vertical.
Pt Sta
Computes the offsets of the selected point.
Curr Sta
Computes and displays the offsets to the current point.
Start
Starts the survey process. After pressing the button, the name changes
to Accept and a new button Cancel appears along with the count of
the epochs achieved. The point is automatically saved if it meets the
criteria for Logging the point as specified in Settings.

Tape Dimension
The Tape Dim tab contains the settings for performing the survey.
Point
The name of the next point in the survey.
Code
The code and attributes of the Point. Code can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
Dist Left/Dist Right
Toggles between Dist Left and Dist Right values. These set the
direction of the next movement, relative to the previous direction. The
field below sets the distance to move.
Accept
Applies the taped distance to the perimeter line.
Finish
Opens the floating menu of two items:
Close Polygon: connects the first and the last two points with a line.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 11-7


GPS Survey

Calc Closure: calculates the difference between the last and the first
points.

Ref Line
The Tape Dimension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of
structures, such as buildings, that have features perpendicular to each
other. This is done using tape measurements relative to the two known
points that belong to one side of the structure (wall of the building),
forming the reference line.
The Ref Line tab contains information about the two points
comprising the reference line.
Start Pt
Contains the properties of the starting point: the name (can be entered
manually, or chosen from the map or list) and code. Also, the point
can be measured by pressing the Meas button.
End Pt
Contains the properties of the ending point: the name (can be entered
manually, or chosen from the map or list) and code. Also the point
can be measured by pressing the Meas button.

X-Section
The X-Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another
in a plane perpendicular to the center line. If the road has not been set,
you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the
Observations from the Topo Dialog.
Point
Displays the name of the point to be logged.
Code
Enter the Code and Attributes for the Point the first time a line is
recorded. This will automatically update from the next line.
Ant Ht

11-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


X-Section

The measured antenna height and type (vertical or slant) of


measurement.
Epoch count
Shows the number of the epochs used in averaging the position.
Start
Starts the survey process. Pressing the button changes the name to
Accept and a new button Cancel appears along with the count of the
epochs achieved. The point is automatically saved if it meets the
criteria for Logging the point as specified in Settings.
Along CL/Offset
The offset values for the current position get displayed if a Road has
been selected.

Data
The X-Sect Data page contains the information of the base and the
last point that has been logged since this dialog was opened. If an
alignment has been defined the offset values get displayed as well.

Map
The Map tab shows the stored points graphically. All the survey
process can be done through this page as well.

PTL Mode
The Point-To-Line mode (PTL) is a method of interpretation of the
point coordinates. The coordinates are defined through the two
reference points. The line trace through these points is set as one axis
and its perpendicular as another.
Start Ref Point, End Ref Point
The names of the reference points. Select these points from the map
or select from the list of points.
PTL Mode On
Enables the PTL mode if checked.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 11-9


GPS Survey

Laser Setup
Occ Point
The occupation point can be selected by either entering the name, by
selecting it from the map or the list, or it can be obtained from the BS
dialog (when there is an encoder).
BS Azimuth/BS Point
You can enter the BS Azimuth value, select the BS point, or obtain it
from the BS dialog (when we have an encoder).
Laser HI
Height of the device above the Occ Point.
Point
Name of the Point being measured.
Code
Code of the point being measured.
BS Meas (when we have encoder)
Takes you to the Laser BS Meas dialog.
There is a message window which guides you on what to do and
displays the measurement values.

11-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 12

Optical Survey Setup


Setup Optical (Total Station)
Folder
Click an icon to perform the task:

Localization
Calculates localization parameters of the mathematical
coordinate transformation between an original
coordinate system, in which the job points are measured
or given, and a local coordinate system, in which control
points are known. Find out more...

Backsight
Sets up a Total Station survey with a reference direction.

Resection
Computes the coordinates of an occupation point, where
the instrument is set up, using measurements to two (or
more) points with known coordinates.

Benchmark
Computes the elevation of an occupation point, where
the instrument is set up, using measurements to two (or
more) points with known elevations.

Remote Ctrl
Transmits commands from the controller to the
motorized total station.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 12-1


Optical Survey Setup

BS Survey
The Backsight Survey dialog contains the parameters of the
Backsight station.
The BS Setup page contains following parameters:
Occ. Point
The name of the point where the total station is located.
The Occ. Point floating menu allows access to the: Resection: opens
the Resection dialog that allows you to determine the occupation
point coordinates by solving the resection task using the known point
coordinates.
Elevation: opens the Elevation dialog.
HI
Set the height of the instrument above the mark.
HR
Set the height of the target above the mark.
BS Point (BS Azimuth)
Set the backsight point location or the direction to it.
BS Circle
Displays the horizontal circle reading corresponding to the backsight
point. The bitmap next to the BS Circle field brings up the floating
menu that recommends setting the BS Circle value to zero or azimuth,
or to change the value by +/- 90 or 180 degrees.
Measure distance to BS
Set if the distance to the backsight point should be measured.
Fixed HR at BS
Set if the height of the backsight point is fixed for the whole set of
measurements. This is useful when one target is mounted at the BS
for the duration of an occupation and another is used for the sideshots.
Check BS
Opens the Check Backsight dialog for the backsight point checking.

12-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


BS Survey

HC Set
Sets the horizontal circle as defined in the BS Circle field.
Meas BS
Measures the Backsight point.
Settings
Opens the Mode dialog.
The bitmap on the upper-left corner brings up the following pop-up
menu list: Edit Points: opens the Points list. 
Edit Raw: opens the Raw TS dialog. 
Inverse: opens the Inverse COGO dialog.
Intersection: opens the Intersection COGO dialog.
The Data page displays the available values of the backsight point
parameters: Local coordinates (east, north and height),
Angle right
Azimuth
HA (Horizontal Angle)
VA (Vertical Angle)
SD (Slope Distance)
There are two fields in the top of the page where you can see the
height of the instrument and the azimuth.

Check Backsight
The Check Backsight dialog contains information about the backsight
point errors. There are two fields in the top of the page where one can
see the height of the instrument and the azimuth.
Check distance to BS
Set if it is necessary to check the distance to the backsight point along
with the angle measurement (when pressing the Check button).
Check
Checks the errors in angle and distance measurements and displays
them on the dialog.
HC Set

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 12-3


Optical Survey Setup

Sets the horizontal circle to the selected value.

Remote Control
From the Remote Control dialog, you can control the total station
through the radio. It shows the current values of the total station
measurements and provides a set of tools for the control.
The button with arrows switches the keyboard control on and off and
shows the current status of the switch.
Qlock
Sends the "Quicklock" or "Turn Around" command which will cause
the Total Station to search for the RC-2. RC-2 is the Remote Control
System 2 for optical communications. For instructions on how to
operate the RC-2 device, consult the instruction manual for RC-2.
Search
Make the instrument search for the prism.
Lock
Locks onto the prism or tracks it.
Turn
Opens the Rotate dialog, which allows the Total station to turn to
various angles or points.
Stop
Makes the total station stop tracking the prism and go into a
"Standby" mode. The Data Indicator above the Qlock button shows
the current state of the Total Station. There are four types: no data,
querying status, turning, and receiving data.
All the observations can be done in the remote mode as well if the
chosen instrument chosen is robotic.

Robotic Arrows
The buttons enable you to turn the total station on devices without
arrow keys.

12-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Resection

Each button corresponds to a direction to turn, plus the button in the


center can be used to stop turning.

Resection
The method of resection allows you to define the horizontal
coordinates for the occupation point. Two points with distance
measurements are the minimum required to determine the occupation
coordinates and the backsight constant. With angle-only
measurements, 3 points are required. Additional points can also be
measured, in which case a least-squared weighing is used.
Point
The known point name.
Code
The known point code. The code can be entered or chosen from the
drop-down list.
HR
The height of the rod.
Meas
Takes the sideshot to the point.

Resection Options
The resection options dialog controls the input parameters and
options for the implementation of the least squares solution.
Resection Type
Whether you are performing a 2D or 3D resection.
Resection Method
When performing a 3D resection, this determines whether the least
squares solution is split into horizontal and vertical solutions or
performed as a single 3D solution.
Use Default Measurement Accuracy

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 12-5


Optical Survey Setup

Sets the system default values for measurement accuracy.


Distance
Error in the distance measurement.
PPM
Part per million error in the distance measurement.
Horz Angle
Error in the horizontal angle measurement.
Vert Angle
Error in the vertical angle measurement.

12-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 13

Optical Survey
Survey Optical (Total Station)
Click an icon to start the desired survey:

Topo
Conducts a survey with sideshot points and determines
inaccessible points by setting Offsets from measured
points. Find out more on Offsets.

Auto Topo
Collects points by Time and Distance only with Robotic
instruments.

X-Section
Obtains the coordinates of points that lie on a plane
perpendicular to a road center line. This type of survey is
typically performed by moving from one side of a road
to the other in the cross-sectional plane, and then
crossing back in the opposite direction at a different
location along the road.

Find Station
Identifies the station by the distance, computed to the
station, and the offset from the road.

Tape Dimentions
Calculates the periphery of structures using tape
measurements relative to the two known points that
belong to one side of the structure.

Missing Line
Emulates the total station measurement from one point
to another and stores the result to the Raw Data database.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-1


Optical Survey

Scanning
Collects points by scanning (with or without images)
with Robotic and motorized reflectorless instruments.

Monitor
Measures one or more prisms repeatedly and uses the
measurements to detect changes in the position of the
prisms. The measurements are recorded into the raw data
file.

Topo Survey
Sideshot-Direct
The Sideshot-Dir dialog contains the initial data for performing single
sideshots and displays the information during survey. The
measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct position of the
Total Station.
Point
Sets the current point name. During the survey the numerical part of
the name changes automatically by one.
Code
Sets the Code for the current point. This can be entered or chosen
from the drop-down list.
The bitmap next to the Attributes List bitmap brings up the following
list:
String: displays a control to enter the string for the point. 
Multiple Code: opens the Multiple Code Strings dialog. 
Control Code: opens the Controls dialog. 
Note: opens the Notes dialog. 
PTL Mode: opens the PTL Mode dialog.
HR
Sets the height of the target above the mark (rod height).

13-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets

BS Setup
Opens the Backsight Survey dialog for setting the backsight point.
Meas
Takes a measurement and logs the point.

Sideshot-Direct/Reverse
The measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct Position
and the Reverse Position of the Total Station (i.e., Plunge - Flip and
Rotate the Total station by 180 degrees to get the reverse
measurement). One set consists of one direct and one reverse
measurement. These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical
circle centering errors.
This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot-Direct dialog except that
one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single
one.

Ang/dist Sets-Dir/Rev
In this method for the measurement to a single point, the instrument
will use the specified Angle sequence to perform repeated
measurements. The sequence of four measurements constitutes one
set. One measurement is the backsight in Direct phase or the
Foresight in Reverse phase in two positions of the Total Station.
These measurements are used to eliminate centering errors in the
horizontal and vertical circles.
This dialog behaves similar to the Sideshot-Direct dialog except that
one measurement constitutes a set of readings rather than a single
one.

Offsets
The Offsets page contains a set of tools for defining the offsets.
Hz Angle

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-3


Optical Survey

Defines a point using the horizontal angle from one point and the
distance to another.
Hz-Vt Angle
Defines a point using the horizontal and vertical angles.
Dist. Offset
Defines a point giving you the ability to add or subtract distances,
horizontally and vertically.
2 Line ISection
Determines a point by the intersection of the two lines. Each line is
defined by two points or two measurements.
Line & Corner
Determines a point on the corner using one line defined by two points
and a horizontal angle measurement.
Line & Offset
Determines a point that is in a distance from a line defined by two
points.
Plane & Corner
Determines a point (Corner) by a plane defined by three points and
horizontal and vertical angle measurements.

Station and Offset


The Station and Offset dialog allows the backsight or occupation
point to be determined by the station, offset and elevation in relation
to a road.
Road
The referenced alignment can be a road or horizontal alignment.
Station
Enter the station along the road where this point should occur.
Offset
Enter the offset from the road where this point should occur.

13-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets

Elevation
Enter the elevation of the point.

HA Offset
The Sideshot page of the Horizontal Angle Offset dialog contains
data for defining a point using the horizontal angle from one point and
the distance to another.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. Can be entered or selected from
the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
Settings
Opens the Mode dialog.
Side and Center
Measure to Center and obtain the vertical angle and horizontal angle
measurements. A Side measurement provides VA, HA, and distance
measurements. With these two sets of measurements, the computation
can be made for a point at the center of a tree.

Hz/Vt Angle Offset


The Survey Offsets dialog in the Hz-Vt Angle mode contains data for
defining a point using the horizontal and vertical angles and a
distance.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-5


Optical Survey

Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height.
Distance
Measures the slope distance to target.
HA/VA
Combines the horizontal angle and vertical angle measurements with
distance logged in Distance step to determine the point location.

Distance Offset
The Distance Offset dialog contains data for the definition of a point
giving the ability to add or subtract distances, horizontally and
vertically.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
The Distance Offsets field contains the three parameters of the offset:
Down sets the height of the point relative to the current position.
Toward sets the distance between the current point and the projection
of the offset point on the line of sight.
Right sets the distance between the offset point and its projection,
taking into consideration its location relative to the line of sight.
Meas
Performs the measurement.

13-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets

Hidden Point
The Measurement tab of the Hidden Point dialog allows you to define
a point on the ground surface with a slanted rod touching the ground
point. The rod has two targets.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
Rod Pt1
Measures the first target on the rod.
Rod Pt2
Measures the second target on the rod.

Two Line Intersection


The Intersection dialog contains data for determining a point by the
intersection of the two lines. Each line is defined by two points or two
measurements.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
Line 1 Pt1

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-7


Optical Survey

Obtain measurements to determine the first point defining the first


line.
Line 1 Pt 2
Obtain measurements to determine the second point defining the first
line.
Line 2 Pt 1
Obtain measurements to determine the first point defining the second
line.
Line 2 Pt 2
Obtain measurements to determine the second point defining the
second line.

Line and Corner


The Line and Corner dialog contains data for determining a point on
the corner using one line defined by two points.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
Line Pt1
Obtains measurements to determine the first point defining a line.
Line Pt2
Obtains measurements to determine the second point defining a line.
Corner
Obtains the horizontal angle to locate a point on the line at the corner.

13-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets

Line and Offset


The Line and Offset dialog contains data for the determining a point
distance from a line defined by two points.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
The Distance Offsets field contains the three parameters of the offset:
Down: sets the height of the point relative to the current position.
Toward: sets the distance between the current point and the projection
of the offset point on the line of sight. 
Right: sets the distance between the offset point and its projection,
taking into consideration its location relative to the line of sight.
Line Pt1
Obtains measurements to the first point on the line.
Line Pt2
Obtains measurements to the second point on the line.

Plane and Corner


The Plane and Corner dialog helps you to determine a point (Corner)
by a plane defined by three points and an angle measurement.
Point
Name for the offset point to be stored.
Code
Code for the offset point to be stored. This can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list.
HR

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-9


Optical Survey

Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).


Plane 1
Obtains measurements to determine the first point in a plane.
Plane 2
Obtains measurements to determine the second point in a plane.
Plane 3
Obtains measurements to determine the third point in a plane.
Corner
Obtains horizontal and vertical angle measurements to determine the
point in a plane at the corner.

Note: Three points defining the plane must not be colinear (all on the
same line).

Auto Topo
This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allows
you to collect points by Time and Distance. To open the Auto Topo
dialog, select Survey->Auto Topo in the Robotic mode.
Point
Displays the current point name.
Code
Displays the current point code. The code can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list. Attributes and the notes etc can also
be set for the point by selecting from the menu next to the code.
HR
The height of the rod (target).
Start
Starts the survey process. After pressing, the button changes the name
to End.
Log Now

13-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Elevation (Multiple)

Immediately stores the current position.


Stop
Makes the total station stop tracking the prism and go into "Standby"
mode.
Turn
Opens the Rotate dialog which allows the Total station to turn to
various angles or points.
Lock
Lock onto the prism or "track" it.
Search
Makes the instrument search for the prism.
Qlock
Sends the "Quicklock" or "Turn Around" command which will cause
the Total Station to search for the RC-21.

Elevation (Multiple)
The method of elevation allows you to define the vertical coordinate
using the coordinates of two (or more) known points.
Point
The known point name.
Code
The known point's code.
HR
The height of the rod.
Meas
Takes the sideshot to the point.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-11


Optical Survey

Multiple Backsight
Multiple backsight points allow you to perform more precise
measurements.
Point
The known point name.
Code
The known point's code.
HR
The height of the rod.
Meas
Takes the sideshot to the point.

Multi Set Page


The page contains the data collected during the measurements,
grouped by sets (one set for Multiple mode contains two
measurements; one set of the Repeat mode contains four
measurements).
The columns are: 
Set: the name of the set 
Res HA: Difference of each HA measurement within the set from the
average of all the HA's in the set
Res VA: Difference of each VA measurement within the set from the
average of all the VA's in the set
Res SD: Difference of each SD measurement within the set from the
average of all the SD's in the set
HA: Horizontal Angle measurement within the corresponding set
VA: Vertical Angle measurement within the corresponding set
SD: Slope Distance measurement within the corresponding set
Remove
Deletes all measurements from the set.
Accept

13-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Find Station

Saves the measured point.


Add
Brings you to the sideshot page to measure a new set of angles.

Find Station
The Measurement tab of the Find Station dialog is used for the
identification of the station by computing the distance from the
beginning of the road to the projection of the station to the road, and
the offset of the station from the center line of the road.
Road
Type the name for the road or select it from the list.
Point
The name of the point to Find Station to store after taking a
measurement.
Code
The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered
manually or chosen from the drop-down list.
HR
Sets the target height above the mark (rod height).
BS Setup
Opens the Backsight Survey dialog for setting the backsight point.
The information displayed is the same as has been entered.
Pt Stn
Computes the offsets of the selected point.
Cur Stn
Takes a shot to the point and computes and displays the offsets.
Meas
Takes a shot to the point, stores it, and computes and displays the
offsets in the Results tab.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-13


Optical Survey

Missing Line
The Missing Line dialog emulates the total station measurement from
one point to another and stores the result to the Raw Data database.
The Start and End points can be entered manually, chosen from the
map or from the list, or measured through the Meas button.

Tape Dimension
The Tape Dim tab contains the settings for performing the survey.
Point
The name of the next point in the survey.
Code
The code and attributes of the Point. The code can be entered
manually or chosen from the drop-down list.
Dist Left/Dist Right
Toggles between Dist Left and Dist Right values. These set the
direction of the next movement, relative to the previous direction. The
field below sets the distance to move.
Accept
Applies the taped distance to the perimeter line.
Finish
Opens the floating menu of two items:
Close Polygon: connects the first and the last two points with a line.
Calc Closure: calculates the difference between the last and the first
points.

Reference Line
The Tape Dimension dialog allows you to calculate the periphery of
structures, such as buildings, that have features perpendicular to each
other. This is done using tape measurements, relative to the two

13-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


XSect-Direct/Reverse

known points that belong to one side of the structure (wall of the
building), forming the reference line.
The Ref Line tab contains information about the two points
comprising the reference line.
Start Pt
Contains the properties of the starting point: the name (can be entered
manually, or chosen from the map or list) and code. Also the point
can be measured by pressing the Meas button.
End Pt
Contains the properties of the ending point: the name (can be entered
manually, or chosen from the map or list) and code. Also the point
can be measured by pressing the Meas button.
XSect-Direct
The X-Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another
in a plane perpendicular to the center line. If the road has not been set,
you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the
Observations from the Sideshot-Direct Dialog.
Cur Sta
Takes a shot of the point and computes and displays the offsets.

XSect-Direct/Reverse
The X-Sect survey is performed from one side of the road to another
in a plane perpendicular to the center line. If the road has not been set,
you should define the plane. The points are surveyed similar to the
Observations from the Sideshot-Direct/Reverse Dialog.
Cur Sta
Takes a shot of the point and computes and displays the offsets.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-15


Optical Survey

Remote Rotate
The Rotate dialog contains the settings of the remote total station
rotation.
Rotation Angles
Sets the values of the horizontal and vertical rotation angles.
Turn
Sends the data to the total station.
Rotate to Point
Select a point by typing its name, or choosing it from the map or the
list. Insert the HR value (height of rod or target), and press the Turn
button.
Plunge TS
Press to plunge the instrument (rotate the telescope and the body by
180 degrees).

Remote Scanning
This function is activated only with Robotic instruments and allows
you to scan with Robotic Total Stations. To open the Scanning dialog,
select Survey->Scanning in the Robotic mode.
Point
Displays the name of the point. This can be chosen from the map or
drop-down list.
Code
Displays the current point code. The code can be entered manually or
chosen from the drop-down list. Attributes and the notes etc can also
be set for the point by selecting from the menu next to the code.
Orientation
Selects the type of plane (Horizontal, Vertical or Inclined) in which to
scan.

13-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Remote Scanning

Next
Opens another Scanning dialog to set spacing and start scanning.
Back
Opens the first set of options for Remote Scanning.
Spacing
Displays the distance between points.

Scanning
In the Scanning dialog select a desired scan type: either Scan with
Image or Scan w/o Image.
If Scan w/o Image is selected, select the Orientation of the scan -
Vertical, Horizontal or Incline.
Select Scan
The Select Scan dialog displays the settings for a scan session.
Session
Sets a Session name.
Image
Sets an Image file. Select a previous Image or browse for a new one
(Images are stored as JPEG with the *.jpg file extension.)
Camera
Sets the Camera information. If the Image exists in the Job, the
Camera information will be selected automatically; otherwise, select
a previous Camera or browse for a new one (Cameras are stored as a
text file with the *.cmr extension.)
View
Opens the View Scan dialog.
Back
Returns to the previous dialog.
Next

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-17


Optical Survey

Once all fields are filled, clicking the button opens the Orient dialog.

View Scan
The View Scan dialog displays the image along with orientation and
scanned points for completed scan sessions.

Orientation
The Orient dialog associates a position on the image (x, y) with
known N, E, Z coordinates.
There are buttons to zoom in, zoom out, display the whole image, and
switch on/off the keyboard arrow keys that duplicate the arrows on the
dialog.
The bitmap next to the Meas button displays the menu of three items
(Meas, From Map, From List).
Tap on Orientation Pt: Tap on the image in a rough area of where
the orientation point is located. The image will zoom to this point and
show a crosshair. The position of the crosshair can be adjusted.
Select or meas Orient Pt: select a known point from the Point List or
Map, or measure a new point.
Calc
When a minimum of four orientation points are established, clicking
the button computes the image orientation and displays the results.

Orientation Results
The Orient Res dialog displays the results of the image orientation.
Accept
Continues to the Scanning dialog to select areas for scanning.
Remove
Removes the selected point to adjust the orientation calculation. If
four points still remain, the new results are displayed. If there are less

13-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Remote Scanning

than four orientation points, then the Orientation Results dialog will
close automatically to continue the orientation procedure.

Scan
To select one or more areas for scanning, you can:
• Draw a rectangle by pressing the stylus on the dialog for the start
point and dragging it to the end point. When the stylus is lifted,
the area is set.
• Draw a polygon by pressing the stylus down at each vertex. Lines
will be drawn connecting each vertex to the previous one. Press
the stylus near the first vertex to close the area.
Start
When the areas are set, pressing the button begins the scan. The
Interval dialog opens so you can set the scanning parameters.
Clear
Erases all drawn areas.
Settings
Opens the Mode dialog. The main use is to set the instrument to
"Non-Prism" mode, which is required for scanning and also to change
the measurement mode (Fine, Coarse).

Scan
As the total station measures points within the predefined area, each
point will be displayed on the image.
Stop
Immediately stops the scan.

Interval
The Interval dialog sets the starting point, and horizontal and vertical
intervals for scanning.
Start Point

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-19


Optical Survey

The starting point name.


Interval
Enters the scanning intervals either as Angle or number of points.
HA
Horizontal interval.
VA
Vertical interval.

Estimate Time
Before scanning begins, the Estimate Time dialog displays the
scanning information including the total number of points to be
scanned and an estimate of the time it will take to complete the scan.
If the estimated time is too long, click Cancel and enter larger
intervals. Click OK to begin scanning points.

Monitor
The Monitor function measures one or more prisms repeatedly and
uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms.
The measurements are recorded into the raw data file.
Optionally, the raw measurements or the computed points can be
outputted to a file or communication port in either the FC-6 or GTS-7
formats. The output format and destination is accessed from the
Monitor Options dialog when configuring the total station.
The Monitor dialog is used to control the monitor survey.
Points
The point name.
Interval
Interval listed as the Cycle Time. If a prism cannot be found after a
period of 15 seconds, the total station will rotate to the next point in
the sequence.

13-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Monitor

Auto
If the Auto combo box is set to ON, the total station automatically
rotates to the next point in the sequence and records a measurement.
If it is set to OFF, the total station rotates to the point, but allows you
to verify or correct the centering to the prism prior to taking a
measurement. The monitor function will always complete the entire
sequence, even if the measurements take longer than the cycle time.
Start
Initiates the sequence of measurements, which repeats at the desired
interval.
Qlock
Sends the 'Quicklock' or 'Turn Around' command that will cause the
Total Station to search for the RC-21.
Search
Make the instrument search for the prism.
Lock
Lock onto the prism or 'track' it.
Turn
Opens the Rotate dialog that allows the Total station to turn to various
angles or points.
Stop
Makes the total station stop tracking the prism and go into 'Standby'
mode.
The Data Indicator above the Qlock button shows the current
state of the robotic Total Station. There are four types:
- no data
- querying status
- turning

Monitor Options
Log To

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-21


Optical Survey

Select from options None, File, or communication ports.


If Log To File or a communication port is chosen, select from the
following:
Output Type
Select whether to output Raw Data or Coordinates.
Output Format
For Raw Data, select whether to output to a FC-5, FC-6/GTS-7 or
GTS-6 format.
For Coordinates, only the GGA format is available.
File Name
If Log To File is chosen, enter the name and location of the file to log
to.
Comm Settings
If a serial COM port is selected, enter the baud rate, parity, data and
stop bits settings for the comm port.
Store As Check Point
When checked, the measurements are stored as Check Points to the
original points in the monitor list; otherwise, they are stored as
normal points.

Monitor Point List


The Monitor Point List dialog allows you to monitor points and create
a point list to monitor.
Point List
The pre-existing points list. Can be chosen from the list or entered
manually.
List of Points
The list of currently selected points.
The Up and Down arrows to the left of List of Points allows you to
move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.
The arrows symbol switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys that

13-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Monitor

duplicate the arrows on the dialog.


The X symbol deletes the highlighted point from the list.
The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle
between the point list and the plot with the point list.
HR
The rod (target) height.
Next
Opens the Survey dialog to monitor.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 13-23


Optical Survey

Notes:

13-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 14

Level Survey
Create Level Run
Enter information needed to create a Level Run.
Name
Enter a name for the Level Run.
Note
Enter a description for the Level Run.

Level Run
This dialog displays information regarding the Digital Level Run in
progress.
The items to be displayed and the order of items to be displayed can
be selected by clicking Display Settings on the top left menu.
Point Id
You can select the point from the map, list, or enter the name.
Code
You can enter the code for the point to be measured.
BS
Click on BS to take a Backsight shot.
SS
Click on SS to take a Sideshot measurement.
FS
Click on FS to take a Foresight measurement.
Show SumBS-SumFS

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 14-1


Level Survey

If this option is turned on (Top Left Menu), then the SumBS-SumFS


will be displayed below the Level Run information.

Shots
Guides you through the sets needed to be taken for the measurement.
Meas
Click Meas to take a shot.

Stake SS
This dialog helps you to stake an SS point for the level run.
The dialog displays the BS Point (already measured) and the SS
point. You have the option to select a different SS point from the map
or list. Also displayed are the rod ht and the horizontal distance for
the BS and SS points.
The Height of Instrument is also displayed.
Meas
Takes a measurement to the SS point and displays the elevation and
cut/fill values.
Click Ok to save the measurement to the Level Run. Cancel quits the
dialog without saving the value.

Two Peg Test


The Two Peg Test dialog guides you through a series of
measurements to help determine any error in the line of sight through
the level when the bubble is centered.
Center yourself between the two points to measure and take a
measurement to Peg1, and then to Peg2. Move the instrument to one
of the pegs and then take the shots again to Pegs 1 and 2. The results
are displayed.
Meas
Click Meas to take the measurement for the displayed prompted Peg.

14-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Two Peg Test

Locate Peg2
Measures the horizontal distance to Peg2 and compares it with the
already taken measurement to Peg1. This measurement is not used in
the error computations.

Two Peg Test Results


The results of the Two Peg testing appear on this dialog after all
measurements are taken. The dialog displays all the shots taken and
the computed error.

Settings
Select the columns to be displayed for a level run from this dialog.
The order of the columns to be displayed can be changed by selecting
the display column and clicking the up and down arrow.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 14-3


Level Survey

Notes:

14-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 15

Staking

Stake folder
Click an icon to perform the task:

Points GPS
Points Optical (Total Station)
Points Optical (Level)
Stakes design points with known elevation.

Lines GPS
Lines Optical (Total Station)
Determines points along desired lines formed by design
points.

Offsets
With offsets, you can stake a Line, Intersection, 3 Pt
Curve, Curve, and Spiral.

Surface
There are three types of Stake Surface: Elevation, Road,
and DTM.

Elevation
Only for Optical Level mode. Stakes the elevation of a
point.

Point in Direction
Stakes a point using a known point, the azimuth, and the
offsets from the azimuth line.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-1


Staking

Point List
Stakes points in a point list.
Point List Optical (Level)
Stakes the list’s design points to determine the elevation
and compute a cut/fill value at every point in the list.

Curve
Stakes points along a horizontal curve.

Real-Time Road
Stakes points on a road in real time.

Road
Stakes points on a road.

Slope
Stakes points near a slope on the desired alignment.

Linework
Stakes points on a linework selected either by
CodeString, from a linework list, or from the map.

Stake Point
The Stakeout Point dialog contains the initial data for the point
stakeout.
Design Point
Enter the point to stakeout. This can also be chosen from the map, the
list, or a new point.
Code
Enter the code for the design point.
Antenna Ht (for GPS)

15-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake DL Point

Shows the default height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above
the mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna
height, and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog. To do this,
click the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
HR (for TS)
Enter the reflector height.
Stake Report
Shows the name of the current stake report if it is set.
Stake
Opens the Stake dialog, assisting the stakeout process.

The icon on the upper-left corner opens the pop-up menu for
additional options. More...

Stake pop-up menu


Status: opens the Status dialog 
Config Radio: opens the Configure Radio dialog 
BS Setup: opens the BS dialog 
Config Link (only for the Robotic mode): opens the Configure Link
dialogRemote Control (only for the Robotic mode): opens the
Remote Control dialog
Edit Points: opens the Points dialog
PTL Mode: if checked, the design point for stakeout is a PTL point.
The From Job list will display only the job points having PTL
coordinates for selection.
Inverse: opens the Two-Point Inverse dialog
View Report: opens the current report
Chats/Create New: opens the Chat dialog

Stake DL Point
Select the BS Point and Design point to stake.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-3


Staking

BS Point
Select the BS point to be used for the backsight measurement.
Design Point
Select the point to stake.
BS
Takes the BS measurement.
Stakeout
Directs you to the Stake dialog to stake the design point.

Stake Line
The Stake Line dialog contains the initial data for the line stakeout.
Start Point
Sets the starting point of the reference line.
End Point/Azimuth
Sets the direction of the reference line by either specifying another
point or the azimuth.
Ht Comp
The type of height computations to use for the stakeout point. This
can be one of the following:
Ht of Start Pt (height of starting point): The stakeout point will have
the same height as the starting point of the line.
Interpolate Ht: The height of the stakeout point will be computed
through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and
ending points of the line.
Antenna Ht (for GPS)
Shows the height of the antenna reference point (ARP) above the
mark. You can edit the antenna type, the value of the antenna height,
and the type of height in the Antenna Setup dialog. To do this, click
the Ant Ht button, and select Edit.
HR (for TS)

15-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake

Enter the reflector height.


Stake
Opens the Stake dialog, assisting the stakeout process.

Stake
The Stake dialog is designed to assist in the stakeout process. The
stake dialog contains a number of flexible features which allow you to
tailor and customize your staking requirements. The main dialog
consists of an instrument panel along the top, stake panel along the
bottom, and a view. Depending on the current staking application
there are a number of different view options which provide different
graphical aids for staking. With the exception of the data view there
are also four selectable data fields to display specific stakeout
information.
Instrument Panel
The Instrument panel along the top of the dialog displays GPS/
Optical instrument specific iconic information. This information can
be displayed or hidden by pressing the arrow button on the left of the
dialog.
Stakeout Panel
The Stakeout Panel along the bottom of the dialog displays a number
of buttons used to provide information and facilitate staking.
Design Button: The design button on the left provides the
information on the current design point. Pressing the button will
display a pop-up list detailing the design point information.
Arrow Buttons: The arrow buttons to the right of the design button
are displayed if the staking application permits multiple point
locations. Pressing the buttons will advance forward and backward
through the different design locations.
Reading Button (for TS): The read button located to the right of the
arrow buttons is used to make an observation.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-5


Staking

Store Button: The storage button located to the far right is used to
save the current staked observation.

Data Fields
All views except the Data view have four selectable data fields used to
display specific staking information. To change one of these data
fields simply press on the field and select it from a list of all the
available fields for the current stake module. The Data view always
contains all the available data fields.

Views
Each of the staking modules has a number of different views to
provide different aspects to help the staking process. To access the
different views press and hold on the stake dialog until the view pop-
up appears for a new selection.

Data View
The Data view is accessible on all stakeout modules. The Data view
provides a detailed list of all data fields available for the current
staking module.

Map View
The Map view is also accessible on all stakeout modules. When
staking in the map view, the background image of the stakeout is the
job's map. A map menu panel is available, which provides the map
controls, such as zoom.

Normal View
The Normal view is available whenever you are staking known design
coordinates. This view provides a directional way of locating the
design locations. If the distance to the design is more than 3 m, a blue
arrow will point to the target direction with the current location in the
center of the dialog. If the distance to the target is less that 3 m, the
graphic shows the target point in the center and the current location.
As soon as the target becomes closer than the Horizontal Distance

15-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stakeout DL

Tolerance value the graphic shows a bull's-eye target point on the


dialog.

Overhead View
The Overhead view is also available whenever you are staking known
design coordinates. This view is similar to a map view and shows the
current location and design location.

Cross Section View


The Cross Section view is available when staking roads. This view
shows the current stake location in a vertical display as well as the
road cross section. A map menu panel is available which provides the
map controls, such as zoom.

Surface View
The Surface view is available when staking DTM. This view shows
the surface and current stake location. A map menu panel is available,
which provides the map controls, such as zoom.

Stakeout DL
This dialog helps you stake a Point or Elevation.
The dialog displays the BS Point (already measured), the Point to
Stake, or Elevation to Stake. Also displayed is the height of the
instrument.
Meas
Takes a measurement to the Rod and displays the elevation and cut/
fill values.
Store
Stores the last measured stake point.

Vertical Offset DL
Vertical Offset

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-7


Staking

Enter the Vertical Offset for the measurement.

Stake Offsets
Click an icon to perform the task:

Line
Stakes a line with offsets in the Horizontal and Vertical
directions.

Intersection
Stakes the intersection point of two lines parallel to two
other lines at specified offsets.

3Pt Curve
Creates a curve to stakeout by selecting three points.

Curve
Stakes a curve (section of an arc) at a specified
horizontal and vertical offset from the curve.

Spiral
Stakes points at specified Horizontal and Vertical offsets
with respect to a specified spiral.

Stake Line & Offsets


Perform a stakeout of a line with offsets in the Horizontal and Vertical
directions.
Start Point
The starting point of the line. The line is defined by the azimuth, the
azimuth to another point, or the End Point of the line.
End Point/Azimuth
The direction of the line set through either the azimuth of the line or
the ending point of the line.
Ht Comp

15-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Offsets

The type of height computations for the stakeout point:


Ht of Start Pt (height of starting point): The stakeout point has the
same height as the starting point of the line.
Interpolate Ht: The height of the stakeout point will be computed
through linear interpolation using the height of the starting and
ending points of the line. (This is unavailable when the direction of
the line is set through azimuth.)
Num Subs
The number of subdivisions you want to subdivide the line. For
instance, a value of 3 indicates the stakeout of four points by
subdividing the line into three equal segments.
Include Transition Point
Check mark and enable if the transition point should be included in
spite of the station distance. More...
Start Sta
The starting station (chainage) of the line.
Next
Opens the Station & Offsets screen.

Transition Points
The Transition Points dialog allows you to select which available
transition points are to be included in the stakeout.
Selections to include:
Horz end point: The node point between horizontal segments.
Horz angle point: The horizontal angle point, used only in
combination with Horz end point.
Horz Radius point: The horizontal radius point - Center point.
Horz intersect: Horizontal intersection of start and end tangent.
Horz midpoint on curve: The middle point of a horizontal curve.
Vert end point: The node point between vertical segments.
Vert high point: The highest vertical point.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-9


Staking

Vert low point: The lowest vertical point.

Station & Offset


The Station & Offset dialog allows you to define parameters for
staking offset locations.
Station/Real-Time button
The Station/Real-Time button allows you to toggle between staking
known and unknown staking locations. For station, enter the starting
station location. The two arrows to the right allow you to decrease or
increase the station by the specified interval.
Interval
The station interval.
Right Offset/Left Offset
The right or left horizontal offset to be applied.
Up/Down
The Up or Down Height offset to be applied.
Back
Returns to the previous initialization dialog.
Stake
Starts the stakeout module for the designated offset locations. More...

Intersection & Offsets / Line 1


The Intersection & Offsets dialog enables you to stakeout out the
intersection point of two lines parallel to two other lines at specified
offsets. The first dialog defines one line (Line 1) and the offset of the
first parallel line. The second dialog field enables you to define
another line (Line 2) and the offset of the second parallel line. The
intersection point of these two parallel lines defines the stakeout
point.
This dialog contains the parameters of the first line:
From Point

15-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Offsets

Starting point of the Line 1.


Az to Pt/Azimuth
The direction of the line. It can be set through the azimuth of the line,
azimuth from the start point to the point selected.
Right Offset/Left Offset
The right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line.

Intersection & Offsets / Line 2


This dialog contains the parameters of the second line:
From Point
Starting point of the Line 2.
Az to Pt/Azimuth
The direction of the line. It can be set through the azimuth of the line
or the azimuth from the start point to the point selected.
Right Offset/Left Offset
The right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line.
Intersect Ht
The height of the intersection point.
Store Point
The name of the intersection point.
Antenna (in the GPS+ case)/HR (in the Optical mode)
The antenna height/The rod (target) height.
Stake
Opens the Stake dialog.

Three Pt Curve
You can create a curve to stakeout by selecting three points. The
dialog changes its appearance depending upon the first point chosen.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-11


Staking

You can manually enter, or select from the list or map the following
sets of points:
• PC Point, Curve Point, PT Point
• RP Point, PC Point, PT Point.
In the second case the distance between RP Point and PC point
should be equal to the distance between RP Point and PT point. The
radius, and the PC and PT points define two curves - one with delta
less than or equal to 180 degrees (Small curve) and the other with
delta greater than or equal to 180 degrees (Large curve). Values of
Small or Large can be selected from the Curve drop-down box to
indicate which of these two curves should be used for computations.
PC Point
The Point of Curve, the starting point of the arc.
PT Point
The Point of tangent to the curve.
RP Point
Radius Point for the curve.
Curve Point
Any point on the curve.
Curve
Specify whether to use the Small or Larger curve.
SS
Specify the Start Station.
Next
Opens the Station & Offsets screen.

Stake Curve & Offsets


The Curve & Offsets dialog function enables you to stakeout a curve
(section of an arc) at a specified horizontal and vertical offset from
the curve.

15-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Offsets

PC Point
The Point of Curve, the starting point of the arc.
Tangent Azi
The azimuth of the Tangent of the curve (arc) at the PC point.
Radius/ Deg Curve/ Deg Chord
The radius parameters of the curve.
Length/Chord/Tangent/Mid Ord/Extern/Delta
Is the length parameter of the curve.
SS
The starting station (chainage) of the line.

Stake Spiral & Offset


The Stake Spiral & Offset dialog is used to stakeout points at
specified Horizontal and Vertical offsets with respect to a specified
spiral.
TS Point
Tangent to Spiral point. This is the starting point of the spiral.
Tangent Azi
The azimuth of the tangent to the spiral at the point TS.
Radius/Deg Chord/Deg Curve
The radius parameter of the spiral at the ending point.
Length/Sp Const
The length of the spiral at the ending point or the Spiral Constant, the
constant of the spiral.
Turn
Specifies whether the spiral turns right or left.
Dir
The direction of "moving":
TS -> SC = TangentSpiral->Spiral Circle. This is the incoming spiral

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-13


Staking

to the internal circle.


CS -> ST = Circle Spiral-> Spiral Tangent. This is the outgoing spiral
from the circle to the Tangent.
SS
The starting station (chainage) of the line.

Stake Surface
Stake Surface enables you to stake a surface as a known fixed
elevation.
Select one of three types of Stake Surface as required: Elevation,
Road, or DTM.

Stake Surface Elevation


To stake a surface of a fixed elevation:
• Select Elevation by clicking the selection button.
• Enter the elevation value in the field. To set the elevation of a

desired point as a fixed elevation, click the list selection

button or map selection button and select the point from


the list or the map.
• Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht field (in the GPS+
case) / the reflector (target) height in the HR field (in Optical
mode)
• Click Stake to start stakeout.
• If required, check the Create Surface box. A Cut/Fill or Elevation
model can be generated from 3 or more staked points. The DTM
created from Create Surface is saved as TIN file. Click Next to

15-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Surface Elevation

specify the name for a new file. By default it will be newTIN.TN3.

Click on the Create TIN dialog to start the stakeout.


• If required, check the Use Alignment box. The Use Alignment
option enables you to use an existing alignment to report stations
and offsets. Click Next to select the name of the alignment. Click

on the Roads dialog to start the stakeout.


• If required, check the Define Boundary box. The Define
Boundary option enables you to specify a boundary (polygon)
from known points. Click Next to do this in the Surface Boundary
dialog.

Surface Boundary
To define a surface boundary:
1. In the Points/Point List/Linework/Area field, select the
current method of selection of data required to create the
boundary.
• For Points, in the Select Pts drop-down list, choose an option
to select multiple points in the job for creating the boundary:
• All - all the job points.
• By Range - points from a range. More...
• By Code - points of a selected code. More...
• By Code String - points of a selected code string. More...
• By Radius - points around a selected point at a certain
distance. More...
• By Layer - points on a selected layer. More...
• From Map - points selected graphically from the map More...
• From List - points from a list of points. More...

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-15


Staking

• For Point List, press the List selection button and select an
existing point list in the job. More... The list name will appear
in the field. The name can also be entered into the field and
added to the point selection by pressing the ok button.
• For Linework and Area, press either the Map selection
button and select an existing linework/area from the map
(more...) or press the List selection button and select an
existing linework/area from the list (more...). The name will
appear in the edit field. The name can also be entered into the
field and added to the point selection by pressing the ok
button.
2. The list will display the points currently selected, and the plot
will display the created surface boundary.
Icons you can use
MAGNET Field general buttons and icons are described here...

Stake Surface Road


To stake a surface of an existing Road:
• Select Road by clicking the selection button.

• Click the list selection button and select the name of the
road from the list.
• Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht field (in the GPS+
case) / the reflector (target) height in the HR field (in Optical
mode).
• Click Stake to start the stakeout.
• If required, check the Create Surface box. A Cut/Fill or Elevation
model can be generated from 3 or more staked points. The DTM
created from Create Surface is saved as a TIN file. Click Next to
specify the name for a new file. By default it will be newTIN.TN3.

Click the button on the Create TIN dialog to start the


stakeout.

15-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake DTM

Stake DTM
To stake a surface of an existing DTM:
• Select DTM by clicking the selection button.

• Click the list selection button and select the DTM in the
disk. More...
• Enter the GPS antenna height in the Ant Ht field (in the GPS+
case) / the reflector (target) height in the HR field (in Optical
mode).
• Click Stake to start stakeout.
• If required, check the Create Surface box. A Cut/Fill or Elevation
model can be generated from 3 or more staked points. The DTM
created from Create Surface is saved as a TIN file. Click Next to
specify the name for a new file. By default it will be newTIN.TN3.

Click on the Create TIN dialog to start the stakeout.


• If required, check the Use Alignment box. The Use Alignment
option enables you to use an existing alignment to report stations
and offsets. Click Next to select the name of the alignment. Click

on the Roads dialog to start the stakeout.

Open DTM
Current DTM
The currently selected DTM.
DTM List
List of available DTMs.
Created
The date and time the selected DTM was created.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-17


Staking

Modified
The date and time the selected DTM was last modified.
Browse
Click on Browse to select a DTM not listed in the above list.
Open
Open the selected DTM.

Stake Point in Direction


The Stake Point in Direction dialog enables you to perform the
stakeout of a point, using the known point, the azimuth, and the
offsets from the azimuth line.
From Point
The starting point. Type the name manually, or select it from the list
or from the map.
Azimuth/Az to Pt
The azimuth can be set by value,or as the direction to another known
point.
Angle Offset
The angle offset from the azimuth line.
Hz Dist
The distance offset along the angle offset line.
Vert Dist
The height offset.
Store Pt
Check this field if it is desired to store the computed point to the data
set.
Ant Ht (in the GPS+ case) / HR (in the Optical mode)
The GPS antenna height/The reflector (target) height.
Stake

15-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Point List

Opens the Stake dialog to perform the stakeout.

Stake Point List


The Stake Point List dialog enables you to stakeout existing points,
create a point list to stakeout, select the starting stakeout point, and
stakeout in direct or reverse order.
Point List
The pre-existing points list. This can be chosen from the list or
entered manually.
List of Points
The list of currently selected points.
The Up and Down arrows to the left of the List of points enables you
to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.
The arrows symbol switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys that
duplicate the arrows on the dialog.
The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle
between the point list and the plot with the point list.
Antenna Ht (in the GPS+ case) / HR (in the Optical mode)
The antenna height/The rod (target) height.
Reverse Order
Check to perform a stakeout starting in reverse oder from the end of
the Point List.
Stake
Opens the Stake dialog.

Stake DL Point List


The Stakeout Point List dialog enables you to stakeout existing
points, select the staring stakeout point, and stakeout in direct or
reverse order.
BS Point

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-19


Staking

Select the BS point to be used for the backsight measurement.


Point List
Select or enter the name of a point list to stake.
List of Points
The list of currently selected points.
The Up and Down arrows to the left of the List of points enables you
to move the highlighted point up or down in the order of the points.
The arrows symbol switches on/off the keyboard arrow keys that
duplicate the arrows on the dialog.
The symbol to the bottom right of the map can be used to toggle
between display of the points list and the plot with the points list.
Stakeout in Reverse Order
Check to perform a stakeout starting from the end of the Points List.
BS
Takes the BS measurement.
Stakeout
Opens the Stakeout dialog.

Stakeout Elevation
The Stakeout Elevation dialog enables you to stakeout a given
elevation.
BS Point
Select the BS point to be used for the backsight measurement.
Elevation
Select or enter the name of a point list to stake.
BS
Takes the BS measurement.
Stakeout
Opens the Stakeout dialog.

15-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Curve

Stake Curve
This dialog enables you to stake a curve (section of an arc) by
specifying two points.
PC Point
The Point of Curve, the starting point of the arc.
PT Point
The Point of Tangency, the ending point of the arc.
Radius/ Deg Curve/ Deg Chord
The radius parameters of the curve.
Turn
Specifies the direction of the arc.
Curve
Determines if the smaller or larger part of the arc between the points
is used.

Stake Real-Time Road


The Real-Time Road dialog enables you to select the road / horizontal
and vertical alignment for stake in real time. The dialog displays the
plan of the selection.
Road / H Alnt / HV Alnt
The road / horizontal and vertical alignment to be staked. This can be
entered manually or chosen from the list.
Start Sta
The starting point of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of
the road.
Ant Ht (in the GPS+ case) / HR (in the Optical mode)
The GPS antenna height/The reflector (target) height.
Next

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-21


Staking

Opens the Stk Road dialog.

Stake Road (Slope)


This dialog shows cut/fill for template slopes, and enables you to edit
the cut/fill slope values.
Template Slopes
Select this radio button to apply the template cut/fill slope values.
Enter Slopes
Select this radio button and enter the cut/fill slope values as required.
Stake
Opens the Stake dialog to perform the stakeout.

Stake Road
The Stake Road dialog enables you to select the road for stakeout and
displays the plan of the chosen road.
Road
The road to be staked. This can be entered manually or chosen from
the list.
Start Sta
The starting point of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of
the road.
Antenna (in the GPS+ case)/HR (in the Optical mode)
The antenna height/The rod (target) height.
Include transition point
Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow
you to select which transition points you wish to include. More...
Next
Opens the Stake Alignment dialog.

15-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Road Alignment

Stake Road Alignment


The Stake Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross
section on the stakeout station and helps you stakeout of all of the
desired points.
Station
The station where the stakeout is performed. The arrow buttons
change the station number by the value of Station Interval.
Stn Interval
The interval of the station increment.
Segment Pt
The point code of the current segment. The arrow buttons in this field
move the current segment point along the cross section. This will
reflect on the scheme in the bottom of this dialog.
Right/Left Offset
The horizontal offset from the current segment point.
Up/Down Offset
The vertical offset from the current segment point.
From the drop-down list:
• Specify the offset location
• Centerline: both the horizontal and vertical offset starts at the
center line.
• Intersect Left: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the
horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line
parallel to the left segment with the cross-section.
• Intersect Right: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the
horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line
parallel to the right segment with the cross-section.
• Segment: the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the
segment; the vertical offset starts at the center line.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-23


Staking

• Surface Left: the horizontal left offset starts at the beginning of


the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of
the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
• Surface Right: the horizontal right offset starts at the beginning of
the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of
the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
Next
Opens the Stk Road dialog.

Stake Slope
The Stake Slope dialog enables you to select the road for stakeout and
displays the plan of the chosen road.
Road
The road to be staked. This can be entered manually or chosen from
the list.
Start Sta
The starting point of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of
the road.
Antenna (in the GPS+ case)/HR (in the Optical mode)
The antenna height/The rod (target) height.
Include transition point
Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow
you to select which transition points you wish to include. More...
Next
Opens the Stake Alignment dialog.

Stake Slope Alignment


The Stake Alignment dialog displays the properties of the cross
section at the stakeout station and helps you stakeout the catch point
(the point where the slope crosses the surface of the terrain) and/or the
offset of the catch point.

15-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Slope

Station
The station where the stakeout is performed. The arrow buttons
change the station number by the value of Station Interval.
Stn Interval
The interval of the station increment.
Hinge Point
The hinge point code. The hinge point is a point of rotation of the Cut/
Fill Slopes. The arrow buttons in this field move the hinge point along
the cross section. This will reflect on the scheme in the bottom of this
dialog.
From the drop-down list:
Specify offsets location
• Centerline: both the horizontal and vertical offset starts at the
center line.
• Intersect Left: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the
horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line
parallel to the left segment with the cross-section.
• Intersect Right: the vertical offset starts at the segment point; the
horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line
parallel to the right segment with the cross-section.
• Segment: the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the
segment; the vertical offset starts at the center line.
• Surface Left: the horizontal left offset starts at the beginning of
the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of
the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
• Surface Right: the horizontal right offset starts at the beginning of
the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point on the surface of
the segment that corresponds with the horizontal offset.
Next
Opens the Stk Slope dialog.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-25


Staking

Stake Linework
To start a linework stake, select Stake / Linework menu.
Linework / Code toggles through two linework selections:
• Code: allows linework selection by CodeString.
• Linework: allows linework selection from the job lineworks
(listed in the dialog) or a polyline selected from the Map. If the
line is a background line, copy the line to the job, update the list
of lineworks and select it in the list.
Include transition point
Press the transition point button to bring up a dialog which will allow
you to select which transition points you wish to include. More...
SS
The starting point of the stakeout, the distance from the beginning of
the linework.
Antenna (in the GPS+ case)/HR (in the Optical mode)
The antenna height/The rod (target) height.
Next
Opens the Station & Offsets dialog.

Station & Offsets


The Station & Offsets dialog contains the settings for the stakeout
session.
Station
The station along the line being staked. The two arrows to the right
enable you to decrease or increase the station by the interval specified
in the Stn Interval shown in the next line.
Stn Interval
The station staking interval.
Right Offset/Left Offset

15-26 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Stake Linework

The right or left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line at
the station shown on the Station field.
Up/Down
The Up or Down Height offset with respect to the height of the line at
the station.
Angle Pts
This option enables you to stake one of the three possible offset
locations when they stakeout to an angle point:
• Offset Bk: the stake location will be on the (back) segment before
the angle point.
• Offset Ahd: the stake location will be on the (ahead) segment after
the angle point.
• Bisector: when bisector is selected, the proposed stake location
will be on the bisectrix of the angle at the computed offset from
the angle point.
Curve Pts
This option enables you to stake one of the four possible locations
when they stakeout to a curve point:
• Offset: the stake location will be on the curve at the offset
distance from the curve point.
• RP: the radius point.
• PI: the point of intersection of tangents to the curve drawn at the
start and end curve points.
• MOC: the point in the middle of the curve.
Stake
Opens the Stake dialog to perform the stakeout.

Design Offsets
The Height dialog is available in the Stakeout Point and Stakeout
PointList in the upper-left menu by selecting Set Ellipsoidal ht, Set

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-27


Staking

Elevation, or Set Z depending on the coord. sys., and display type.


The dialog enables you to change the height of the current point.
Design Height/Elevation
Check the control to apply the Design Height/Elevation for the point
to be staked and enter the elevation to be used.
Road Offset
Check the control to apply the Road Offset to the height of the point
to be staked and enter the offset value to be used.
DTM Offset
Check the control to apply the DTM Offset for the DTM selected to
be staked and enter the offset value to be used.

Set References / Surface and Point


References
This dialog is accessible through the Stakeout Views and the Store
Point dialog when the type of staking uses cross sections (for example
roads). The dialog displays the current cross section, graphically
displayed with all points shown with check marks, the corresponding
label to each point, and lines connecting the points.
Each point and line is selectable and will be marked with a green
color if selected.
Pressing the close dialog button will store the references. All
selections can be cleared through:
Remove selected
Removes all selected references.

Initial Point Name


The Initial Point Name dialog enables you to specify the starting
name for the points calculated for the stakeout task.
First Point
The name of the first point.
Code

15-28 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Store Point

Select the code and attributes of the points. The code can be chosen
from the list or entered manually.

Design Pt/Layer
Display Store Pt Info
Check this control to display the staked point before storing it.
Layer
Select the layer to which this point is to belong.

Store Point
Displays information regarding the Stake Point about to be stored and
allows you to add or edit information.

Stake Tab
The stake tab displays information regarding the staked point about to
be stored in the database.
Name
The name of the point that will be stored in the database.
HR or Ant Ht
The height of the target or GPS antenna used to stake the point.
Vertical/Slant
Specifies whether the entered antenna height is slant or vertical when
performing GPS staking.
Layer
Specifies the layer associated with the staked point.

Data Tab
The data tab displays the stakeout information pertaining to the staked
point.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-29


Staking

Advance
Specifies whether to advance to the next stake point location.

Design Tab
The design tab displays information regarding the design point about
to be stored in the database.
Name
The name of the point that will be stored.
Code
The feature code and attribute information associated with the point.
String
The string the feature code is associated with when the code type is a
line or area.
Layer
Specifies the layer associated with the point.
Note
Specifies the note associated with the point.
Pt Inc/Dec
Specifies the increment or decrement of the name of the next design
point.

Offset from CP
Offset from CP displays information about the offset from the catch
point. This dialog appears after the point has been stored.
HD Offset from CP to OP
Horizontal Distance from the Catch Point to the Offset Point.
Cut/Fill at OP wrt CP
Cut/Fill between the Catch Point and the Offset Point.
Cut/Fill at CP wrt HP

15-30 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Select Value

Cut/Fill between the Hinge Point and the Catch Point.


Cut/Fill Slope (1:n)
Design Slope between the Hinge Point and the Catch Point.
Elevation
Elevation of the Offset Point.
Slope Dist from HP to IP
Slope Distance from the Hinge Point to the Intersection Point.
VD Offset from HP to IP
Vertical Distance from the Hinge Point to the Intersection Point.
Intersection Point
The Intersection Point (IP) is the point between the vertical line at the
Hinge point Cut/Fill slope at the Offset Point.

Select Value
The select value dialog allows you to select which values are to be
displayed in the stake dialog. In the dialog, only select the value you
want displayed and press the green check mark to exit the dialog. You
will be returned to the stakeout dialog, and the value you selected will
now be displayed in the desired label.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 15-31


Staking

Notes:

15-32 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter 16

Applications

Apps Folder
Click an icon to use an application on your device:

Take Photo
Starts the Camera application to take pictures.

Web Browser
Starts Internet Explorer to visit a web address you want.

Photo Viewer
Starts the Pictures & Videos application to view the
pictures attached to the current job.

Files
Opens File Explorer to manage the files.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help 16-1


Applications

Notes:

16-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Chapter A

How To
Localization in MAGNET Field
When you need to obtain points' coordinates in different Grid co-
ordinate systems or a Datum predefined or created in MAGNET
Field, simply select a desired coordinate system. MAGNET
Field will use its own mathematical algorithms to transform co-
ordinates from the current system to the selected one.

For examle, a MAGNET Field job is configured for RTK survey


in a certain grid coordinate system, for example, SPC83-Texas
(Central). Point(s) collected on this grid can be transformed to
any datum or any grid. To do this, select a desired grid, for ex-
ample, SPC83-Texas (North), in the Coordinate System screen.
After selecting the grid, MAGNET Field will display the point
coordinates in the selected coordinate system. See an example of
transformation into other grid coordinate system here.

When transforming GPS points' coordinates measured in


WGS84 coordinate system into a Ground coordinate system,
those algorithms of transformation, which are applied to pre-
defined or user-created grids and datums, do not work. In this
case MAGNET Field has no predefined relation between two
coordinate systems. Set up Localization for coordinate transfor-
mation from WGS84 to Ground (and vise versa).

Related topics:

· Basic Concept of Localization


· Localization with Stereographic Projection on WGS84

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-1


How To

· Localization with Stereographic Projection on any Datum


· Localization with any Predefined or Created Projection
· One-point Localization
· Two-point Localization
· Three-point Localization
· Performing Localization
· Importing Localization Data to Other Job

Basic Concept of Localization


Localization in MAGNET Field is a calculation of transforma-
tion parameters between WGS84 and a ground coordinate sys-
tem. To perform localization, you need to have two independent
sets of coordinates for the same point or few points in the MAG-
NET Field. An independent set of coordinates is a set of such
point coordinates that do not have a relation between each other.
To perform localization in MAGNET Field, you need to select
coordinates in the GROUND coordinate system ("Known
Point") and in the GRID coordinate system or WGS84/DATUM
coordinate system ("Measured Point") for the same point in the
current job. Such a point is called Localization Point.

In MAGNET Field, horizontal localization and vertical localiza-


tion are performed separately. You determine which calculation
the Localization Point uses by selecting the corresponding check
boxes “Use Horizontal” and/or “Use Vertical”. See an example
of using a localization point in both localizations here.

In the common case, when you select three and more localization
points for the given MAGNET Field job and these points take

A-2 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization in MAGNET Field

part in both localizations, MAGNET Field will calculate and use


seven parameters for transformation of all job points:

In the horizontal - offset vector (DX, DY) between the


plane origins of coordinate systems,
(find out the plot rotation angle between these coordi-
here) nate systems, and
scale factor.
In the vertical plane - one shift (HO), and two slopes (Hx,
Hy).

If a geoid is set in the job, MAGNET Field will use this geoid for
calculating orthometric elevations.

Add the desired geoid for calculating orthometric elevations


(add geoid). Calculating orthometric elevations without a geoid
for points in Ground coordinate system can lead to errors in or-
thometric elevations.

The current version of MAGNET Field enables you to perform


the horizontal localization in three ways:

1. Using only the stereographic projection on WGS84 (Find


out more...).
2. Using only the stereographic projection on any datum
(Find out more...).
3. Using any predefined or created projection (Find out
more...).

Localization with Stereographic


Projection on WGS84
If you perform a task of transformation of WGS84 coordinates
into Ground coordinates for a network where the maximum dis-

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-3


How To

tance between the local points is less than 5 kilometers, you can
use the simplest localization. To do this type of localization, set
Projection to None in the Coordinate System dialog before en-
tering localization point(s).

In this case MAGNET Field will ONLY use an oblique stereo-


graphic map projection on WGS-84 as an intermediate step. The
Localization dialog will have only WGS84->Local type in the
Type field.

Localization with Stereographic


Projection on any Datum
If you know a datum for creating a local coordinate system, you
can select this datum in the Coordinate System dialog before se-
lecting localization point(s).

In this case the Localization screen will have two types in the
Type field. If you select Datum->Local localization type,
MAGNET Field will use an oblique stereographic map projec-
tion on the selected Datum as an intermediate step.

Localization with any Predefined or


Created Projection
If you have information about the projection type for creating a
local coordinate system, you can select this projection in the Co-
ordinate System dialog before selecting localization point(s).

In this case you select Grid->Local localization type, and MAG-


NET Field will use this projection and corresponding datum in
the process of calculation of localization parameters.

A-4 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization in MAGNET Field

To calculate the localization parameters between two coordinate


systems is a more rigorous method than using the stereographic
projection for an unknown local projection. This way enables
you to increase the distance between localization points (up to
some hundred of kilometers depending on the type of the projec-
tion) without loss in transformation precision.

One-Point localization
To calculate 7 parameters between a datum and a local ground
you have to select no less than 4 localization points. Only in this
case MAGNET Field will calculate all of the needed parameters
and residuals for localization for each point.

However, as soon as you add ONLY ONE localization point,


MAGNET Field will calculate transformation parameters: only
horizontal and vertical offsets between two coordinate systems
and Combined Scale factor. Rotation between two coordinate
systems cannot be computed. This value is set to zero. The com-
ponents of the deflection of vertical are set to zero as well. Using
these parameters, MAGNET Field will transform measured
points (in the WGS84 coordinate system) to the ground coordi-
nate systems (see our example here).

The horizontal (rH) and vertical (rV) residuals for this localiza-
tion point are equal to zero (see our example here), because co-
ordinates of the "Measured Point" in the ground coordinate
system are equal to the coordinates of the "Known Point" and
vice versa (see our example here).

Plot A displays a Total Station network in the Ground coordinate


system, and plot B displays a GPS network in WGS-84 coordi-
nate system. The networks have some common points. In an ex-
ample with one localization point, we will use points "C2" (for

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-5


How To

Total Station network) and point "C-2_WGS-84" (for GPS net-


work).

Plot C shows that, if both the coordinate systems have non-zero


rotation angle, the accuracy of transformation with only one lo-
calization point can be very poor.

Two-Point Localization
As soon as you add TWO localization points, MAGNET Field
will calculate the horizontal (DX, DY) and vertical (DH) offsets,
azimuth (rotation) and scale factor (see our example here):

In our example with two localization points, we will use points


"C2" and "C4" (for Total Station network) and points "C-
2_WGS-84" and "C-4_WGS-84" (for GPS network). Two
points of localization are enough to calculate all transformation
parameters in the horizontal plane. The horizontal coordinates of
the "Measured Point" in the ground coordinate system are equal
to the coordinates of the "Known Point" and vice versa (see our
example here). The horizontal (rH) residuals for these points are
not calculated and set to zero. The vertical (rV) residuals for
these localization points are calculated (see our example here).
But the components of deflection of vertical are set to zero.

Find an example of two-point localization with non-zero rotation


here.

Three-Point Localization
As soon as you add THREE localization points MAGNET Field
will calculate the horizontal (DX, DY) and vertical (DH) offsets,
azimuth (rotation), scale factor, and components of the deflec-
tion of vertical (see our example here).

A-6 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization in MAGNET Field

Also, the horizontal (rH) residuals for these localization points


are calculated. Three points of localization are enough to calcu-
late all transformation parameters in the vertical plane. The ver-
tical (rV) residuals for these points are not calculated and equal
zero (see our example here).

Performing Localization
Learn localization on a practical example.

· User Task
· Before Rover Measurements
· After Rover Measurements

User Task

In the field you will measure a set of points from several bench-
marks. Five different benchmarks are used as base stations for
this project. The maximum and minimum distance between two
benchmarks is 114 and 16 kilometers, respectively. The rover
points will be determined from the nearest base station in the
RTK mode. See a map of the project here.

All GPS measurements are performed in the WGS84 coordinate


system. All rover points need to have the coordinates in projec-
tion "31 UTM IGN" (for Spain). The error of converting coordi-
nates from WGS84 into "31 UTM IGN" should not exceed 5 cm.

The coordinates of the benchmarks are known and given in the


"31 UTM IGN" for the corresponding datum "EURO50_IGN.”

The user tries to apply the transformation algorithms for pre-


defined grids and datums in MAGNET Field (in our case, be-
tween WGS84 and "31 UTM IGN"), but obtains the errors more

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-7


How To

than 80 cm for plane coordinates and more than 1 meter for ele-
vation for this network.

The user decides to use localization in MAGNET Field.

Before Rover Measurements

To preform localization, you need two sets of the coordinates.

The first is a set of the benchmark coordinates in the "31 UTM


IGN.” This set will be used as a set of GROUND coordinates.
The user has this data and only needs to import this set to a
MAGNET Field job.

The second is a set of the coordinates of the benchmarks in the


WGS84 coordinate system. In our example, we do not have this
set and we need to obtain this data.

NOTE: The error of converting coordinates from WGS84 into


"31 UTM IGN" depends on the errors of two coordinate sets and
the way of transformation in MAGNET Field. If we assume that
transformation in MAGNET Field does not bring an additional
error, and the errors of both sets are of equal accuracy, then we
obtain the errors of the benchmarks coordinates in WGS84 less

than . Such an error of benchmarks coor-


dinates in WGS84 allows the user to convert coordinates from
WGS84 into "31 UTM IGN" with the error not exceeding 5 cm.

Given the long distances between the benchmarks, the user car-
ries out measurements of all five points simultaneously within
three hours. Then raw data collected from five receivers is im-
ported to MAGNET Tools software for post-processing and ad-
justment. See the adjusted network of benchmarks here.

A-8 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization in MAGNET Field

The error of adjusted coordinates does not exceed 12 mm in


plane and 16 mm in height, which meet the specified accuracy of
transformed coordinates (see the results here).

These adjusted coordinates can be used as:

· Coordinates of the base stations to work in RTK mode


· Set of coordinates in WGS84 for localization

The user exports these coordinates (from the MAGNET Tools


job) in text file format and selects "dd mm ss.sss" type for Lat/
Lon coordinates, because MAGNET Field supports this type. To
obtain this file click Job->Export and select Custom Text Format
in the Export window. Click the Save button and select the de-
sired Lat/Lon type in the Custom Format Properties window.
See an example of creating a file of WGS84 coordinates in
MAGNET Tools here.

The user imports these coordinates to a created MAGNET Field


job.

Importing the Coordinate Sets to a


MAGNET Field Job
After obtaining both (WGS84 and Ground) sets of coordinates,
if you know the format of the file, you can import these sets to a
created MAGNET Field job.

Importing the WGS84 set

Importing the Ground set

To import the WGS84 set of adjusted coordinates (the Lat/Lon/


H file) to the MAGNET Field job:

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-9


How To

1. Click the Exchange icon and then From File

.
2. In the From File screen, select the Topcon Text Custom
file format and click Next to continue importing.
3. Navigate to the desired file in the From Text screen and

click .
4. Select the comma delimiter for this file (see the file creat-
ed in MAGNET Tools here) in the Text File Format and
click Next.
5. Select the WGS84 datum and WGS84(Lat/Lon/Ell ht) co-
ordinate type of the imported file in the Coordinate Sys-
tem screen and click Next.
6. Select the format of Lat/Lon in the Units Format dialog

and click .
The Import Status screen displays the import has finished
successfully.
The Point screen displays the coordinates of the WGS84
set.

The next step is to import a GROUND set of coordinates to the


current job. See the original file of the benchmarks coordinates
in the "31 UTM IGN" projection here.

NOTE: For localization to work properly the user SHOULD IM-


PORT these points as points in the GROUND coordinate system
and should not indicate the GRID ("31 UTM IGN" projection)
coordinate system during the import procedure.

A-10 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization in MAGNET Field

1. To import this file into the MAGNET Field job, in the


From File, select the "NEZ(*.csv)" format.
2. Select the GROUND coordinate type in the Coordinate
System dialog to import the set of these coordinates.
3. After the import finishes successfully, the Point screen
displays the coordinates of both sets.

Setting the Desired Projection


You need to set the projection, which will be used in localiza-
tion.

1. Click the Configure icon and then the Coordinate

System icon .
2. To add a desired projection to the list of projections in the

Coordinate System dialog, click in the Projection


line and navigate to the corresponding projection in the
Pre-Defined panel of the Projections dialog.
3. Click the arrow to move the projection to the Active panel

and click to close the screen.


Then this projection appears in the list of projections. Se-
lect the projection here.

Adding the Geoid File


The last thing you can do before starting field measurements of
the rover points is to add the corresponding geoid file. In the Co-

ordinate System dialog, click in the Geoid line and click

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-11


How To

Add, to add the corresponding file. See an example of adding the


appropriate geoid file here.

After Rover Measurements

Measure all rover points from the corresponding base stations


and after completing all measurements, perform the localization
procedure to transform rover points from the WGS84 coordinate
system to the Ground coordinate system. In the given case the
ground coordinate system matches the "31 UTM IGN" projec-
tion.

Creating Localization Points

1. Click Setup and then Localization .


2. Check that the type of localization is Grid->Local.
3. Click Add, and select a point in the Ground coordinate
system from the list.
4. Select a point in the WGS84 coordinate system from the
list.

5. After clicking on the Add Localization dialog, the


Localization dialog displays the first localization point.
6. Perform the above steps and add three more localization
points. You can see on the Localization dialog, that the
horizontal and vertical residuals for localization points are
not more than 6 mm and 10 mm, respectively. All mea-
sured rover points, located inside the polygon formed by
the benchmarks, have the same error of transformation
from WGS84 into the Ground coordinate system.
The Points screen displays all points in the GROUND co-
ordinate system.

A-12 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Localization in MAGNET Field

In the same example, ONLY for TEST, select the WGS84-


>Ground type of localization. MAGNET Field will use the ste-
reographic projection on WGS84. This time the error of transfor-
mation will be more than 1.9 meters (in horizontal localization)
for such distances between the localization points.

Importing Localization Data to


Another Job
If you want to import localization data from one job to another
job, you can activate the automatic import procedure of localiza-
tion data to a job.

1. In the job that contains localization data, click Configure

and then Global .


2. In the New Jobs tab of the Global Settings dialog, select

"Always import" and click to save the changes and


close the window.

3. Then create a new job. For this, click Job and then

New Job . Enter the job name and click to


finish the configuration.
4. MAGNET Field automatically exports the localization
data from the previous job to the current job.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-13


How To

Grid to Ground Transformation


MAGNET Field supports two methods for setting the relation
between Grid and Ground coordinate systems. One method per-
forms scaling and rotation relative to some point of the job. The
other method performs scaling and rotation relative to the origin
of the Grid coordinate system.

To get started with transformation:

1. Click the Configure icon and then the Coordinate

System icon .
2. Select the desired projection through which the link will
be found with some Ground coordinate system. Only after
selecting the projection the option of Grid to Ground
transformation will become available.
3. To activate the Grid to Ground (or vice versa) transforma-
tion select the Use Grid/Ground check box.

4. Press to select a desired transformation method


(from "Origin Pt", "Avg Job Ht" and "Scale Factor") and
set the corresponding parameters for this method.

Find out more:

Creating Ground Projection Relative to a Point

Creating Ground Projection Relative to the Origin of Grid Sys-


tem

A-14 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Grid to Ground Transformation

Parameters of transformation from the Grid to Ground coordi-


nates can be used in the GPS stake of road points. For example,
to stake a point at the distance of 100 meters from some point,
you have to create a ground coordinate system, which will work
as a base coordinate system in GPS stake calculation. To do this,
select the corresponding Grid and enter the average height of a
desired portion of the road. The created ground coordinate sys-
tem enables you to stake points at special distances in the grid
system.

Creating Ground Projection Relative


to a Point
If you know the coordinates of a point in both coordinate sys-
tems (Grid and Ground) and also the rotation of these systems,
then to find the relation between Grid to Ground coordinate sys-
tems, select "Origin Pt" from the Parameters list on the Grid/
Ground Parameters screen.

This method calculates an offset vector in the horizontal plane


between coordinates of a point (called the origin point) in the
grid and ground coordinate systems and computes the ground
coordinates from the grid coordinates using this offset. If a rota-
tion angle is present between these coordinate systems, MAG-
NET Field can rotate a grid or ground coordinate system relative
to this point. Also MAGNET Field takes into account a scale
factor between these coordinate systems. See the plot here.

After determining the relation between both coordinate systems,


MAGNET Field will calculate ground coordinates from the grid
coordinate system and vice versa.

See an example of using this method below.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-15


How To

Example of Using "Origin Pt"


The current MAGNET Field job contains two sets of measured
points:

· One network of points measured by a GR-3 receiver from


a reference station in Grid coordinate system, for example,
SPC83 -Ohio(North).
· Another network of points measured by a Topcon Total
Station (GTS-220) in the Ground coordinate system with
the arbitrary choice of zero BS azimuth.

These networks have:

· A common point - the point CP2 of the GPS network and


point CP2_TS of the TS network. This point is the origin
point for our transformation.
· A common line - the line between CP2 and CP6 points of
the GPS network, and the line between CP2_TS and
CP6_TS of the TS network. The azimuths of this line in
different networks will be used to calculate the rotation
angle between both coordinate systems.

See Map View for the different networks here.

To perform Grid to Ground transformation for these networks:

1. Click , and select the desired Grid system [SPC83


-Ohio(North)] in the Projection field of the Coordinate
System screen.

A-16 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Grid to Ground Transformation

2. Check the Use Grid / Ground box to use this transforma-

tion, and press to open the Grid/Ground Parameters


screen.
3. Select "Origin Pt" in the Parameters field to activate this
method.
4. Select the origin point in the Grid coordinate system (CP2
point) from the list.
5. Remove the coordinates of the selected point in the fields
Northing and Easting, which MAGNET Field automati-
cally writes in the Grid coordinate system.
6. Type in the values of the Ground coordinates of the origin
point (see the Grid/Ground Parameters screen here).

7. Clicking in the Grid/Ground Parameters screen:


· Calculates a combined scale factor for this point.
· Combines the GPS point with the TS point. After
that, in the Ground coordinate system, the GPS
point will have horizontal coordinates of the corre-
sponding TS point, and in the Grid coordinate sys-
tem, the TS point will have horizontal coordinates
of the corresponding GPS point.
· Performs grid to ground transformation (and vice
versa) taking into account the scale factor.

The Map displays the networks either in the Ground or Grid co-
ordinate system.

To take into account the rotation between these two networks in


this transformation:

1. As we see from Map View for the different networks, the


grid azimuth is set by direction of the line CP2 - CP6, and
the ground azimuth is set by direction of the same line in
ground coordinate system (the line CP2_TS - CP6_TS).

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-17


How To

MAGNET Field calculates the corresponding azimuth


when you select the start and end points of the line.

2. Click in the Azimuth Rotation field. The Compute


Rotation screen allows the calculation of Grid and Ground
azimuth to obtain the rotation angle between two coordi-
nate systems (see Grid to Ground Transformation Without
Rotation).
3. Click the Compute button in the Ground line. In the Com-
pute Azimuth screen, select the corresponding points (that
define the common line in the Ground coordinate system)
from the list.
4. Click the Compute button in the Grid line. In the Compute
Azimuth screen, select the corresponding points (that de-
fine the common line in the Grid coordinate system) from
the list.
5. The final rotation angle between two coordinate systems
for our example is displayed in the Rotation field. Click

to save this calculation.


6. The Grid/Ground Parameters screen contains all needed
values to calculate the relation between the Grid and

Ground coordinate systems (see here). Click in this


screen.
7. The Grid to Ground transformation is successfully per-
formed. Find a plot here that displays the error of transfor-
mation taking into account the scale factor and rotation for
the given example.

Creating Ground Projection Relative


to the Origin of Grid System
If you know the value of the scale factor between grid and
ground coordinate systems or the average height of the network,

A-18 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Grid to Ground Transformation

then, in the Grid/Ground Parameters screen, you can select


"Scale Factor" or "Avg Job Ht".

This method calculates plane ground coordinates by scaling, off-


setting, and rotating grid coordinates. Find a graphic explanation
of transformation only by scaling here, only by rotating here, and
only by shifting here.

To find a relation between Grid and Ground coordinate systems:

1. If the scale factor is known, select "Scale factor" in the


Grid/Ground Parameters screen, type in a desired value,
and select the correct direction (Grid to Ground or Ground
to Grid) for this value.
2. If the average height of the network is known, select
"Avg.Job Height" in the Grid/Ground Parameters screen
and type in the desired value of the height in the Avg.Job
Height field.

The Scale Factor will be automatically calculated from:


Scale_Factor = (1+ Avg.Job Height/
Mean_Earth_Radius), where Mean_Earth_Radius =
6371000.0 m

3. In both cases you can enter the rotation and offsets:


· If the angle of rotation is known, type in this value
into the Azimuth Rotation field. MAGNET Field
performs rotation of the Ground relative to the ori-
gin of the Grid coordinate system.
· To shift the Ground system from the selected Grid,
type in the desired plane offsets on the Northing
Offset and Easting Offset fields.

The final coordinates in the Ground will be calculat-


ed from: Nground=Ngrid+Northing_Offset and
Eground=Egrid+Easting_Offset

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-19


How To

Offsets in MAGNET Field


When surveying with GPS receivers and Total Stations (TS),
you may determine points using different types of offsets.

If performing a survey with a GPS receiver, select the GPS de-


vice type in the Connections dialog.

If performing a survey with a TS instrument, select the Optical


device type in the Connections dialog.

Offsets for TS Survey


Offset points are available for surveying only for the Sideshot-
Direct measurement method. Select this method for the Topo
survey in the Survey Parameters. The Offset tab will additionally
display in the Sideshot-Direct screen to enable determination of
any of eight types of offset points.

Follow the link to find out more:

Horizontal Angle Offset

Horizontal/Vertical Angle
Offset
Distance Offset

Hidden Point

Two Lines Intersection

Lines and Corner

A-20 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

Line and Offset

Plane and Corner

Horizontal Angle Offset

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of hor-


izontal (2D) coordinates of an inaccessible center of pipe / tree /
pillar using distance and angle measurements.

To do this determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.
3. The Measurement tab displays. Take two measurements
in any order:
1) Click the Side button, and measure the
distance and horizontal angle to the side
of the pipe / tree / pillar. The prism is lo-
cated on the side of the pipe / tree / pillar.
2) Click the Center button, and measure the
horizontal angle to the center of the pipe
/ tree / pillar.

You can see the plot of measurements for the Horizontal Angle
Offset here.

Note: The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta-
tion- Prism at the Prism point.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-21


How To

The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset (cen-
ter) point. The vertical measurements to this offset point are not
considered, and Hoffset = Hside

Horizontal/Vertical Angle Offset

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point
distance and angle measurements.

To do this determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.
3. The Measurement tab displays. Take two measurements
in the following order:
1) Click the Prism button, and measure the
distance and horizontal angle to the prism.
The prism is located near the inaccessible
point.
2) Click the HA/VA button, and measure the
horizontal and vertical angle to the inac-
cessible point.

You can see the plot of measurements for the Horizontal/Verti-


cal Angle Offset here.

Note: The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta-
tion- Prism at the Prism point.

A-22 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset


point.

Distance Offset

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point
using distance and angle measurements, and additional distance
offsets measurements, for example performed with the tape.

To do this determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.

3. The Measurement tab displays. Click to take mea-


surements to the Prism.
4. Measure offsets from the Prism to the determined point,
and enter their values in the corresponding fields of the
Enter Distance Offsets screen. You can define the direc-
tion of the given offset in two ways: either click on the
button of the current selection or use the minus sign "-" for
the current value. For instance,

and

directions are the same.

The directions of the offsets are explained in the figure that you
can find here.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-23


How To

Note 1: The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line Sta-
tion- Prism.

Note 2: Hoffset_point = Hprism_point + (Up/Down_offset).

The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.

Hidden Point

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point
using distance and angle measurements to two prisms located on
the rod.

To do this determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.
3. The Measurement tab displays. Enter the distance from
the rod’s bottom to Prism 2 in the HR field.
4. Take two measurements in any order:
1) Click the Prism1 icon and measure the dis-
tance, vertical and horizontal angle to the
first prism of the rod.
2) Click the Prism2 icon and measure the dis-
tance, vertical and horizontal angle to the
second prism of the rod.

Find the plot of measurements for the Hidden Point Offset here.

A-24 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset (hid-
den) point.

Two Lines Intersection

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point
as an intersection of two auxiliary lines. You create these lines
(by two points) and perform distance and angle measurements of
the line’s points.

Before performing any measurements, complete the following


preparation tasks:

1. Select any two points (Pt1-1 and Pt2-1), from which the
desired inaccessible offset point is seen. See the plot here.
When selecting the location of these points, bear in mind
that the internal angle formed by the two lines should not
be less than 30 degrees and more than 150 degrees.
2. Set two more points (Pt1-2 and Pt2-2) along the lines "Pt1-
1 - offset point" and "Pt2-1 - offset point", respectively.
See the plot here.

To do this offset determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-25


How To

3. The Measurement tab displays. Take four measurements


in any order:
1) Click the Line1Pt1 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the first point of the first line.
2) Click the Line1Pt2 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the second point of the first line.
3) Click the Line2Pt1 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the first point of the second line.
4) Click the Line2Pt2 icon and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the second point of the second line.

You can see the plot of measurements for the Two Lines Inter-
section Offset here.

Note 1: The height of the prism for all measured points is un-
available in the Measurement tab and should be set in the Back-
sight screen.

Note 2: The height of the offset point is calculated as the mean


of the heights of both lines for this point. See the graph here.

The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset (in-
tersection) point.

Line and Corner

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point,

A-26 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

as intersection of an auxiliary line and a plane. You create a line


(by two points) and a vertical plane passing through the offset
point. You perform distance and angle measurements of the
line’s points and angle measurements of the offset point.

Before any measurements, complete the following preparation


tasks:

1. Select any two points (Pt1-1 and Pt2-1), from which the
desired inaccessible offset point is seen. See the plot here.
When selecting the location of these points, bear in mind
that the internal angle formed by the two lines should not
be less than 30 degrees and more than 150 degrees.
2. Set point Pt2-2 along the line "Pt2-1 - the offset point" and
set up the TS at point Pt1-1. See the plot here.

To do this offset determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.
3. The Measurement tab displays. Take three measurements
in any order:
1) Click the Line1Pt1 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the first point of the line.
2) Click the Line1Pt2 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the second point of the line.
3) Click the Corner button and measure the
vertical and horizontal angle to the offset
point.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-27


How To

You can see the plot of measurements for the Line and Corner
Offset here.

Note 1: The height of the prism for all measured points is un-
available in the Measurement tab and should be set in the Back-
sight screen.

Note 2. The height of the offset point is the height of the line for
this offset point (calculated by extrapolation along the “Pt2-1 -
Pt2-2” line).

The Points screen will display the coordinates of this offset


point.

Line and Offset

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point,
using an auxiliary line and additional distance offsets measure-
ments, for example, made by the tape. You create a line (by two
points), then perform distance and angle measurements of the
line’s points and distance measurements (from this line) to the
offset point.

Before any measurements, you have to select any two points (Pt1
and Pt2) near the inaccessible point. The line which is created by
these points will be an auxiliary line. See the plot here.

To do this offset determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

A-28 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.
3. The Measurement tab displays. Take two measurements
in any order:
1) Click the LinePt1 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the first point of the line.
2) Click the LinePt2 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the second point of the line.
4. Measure the offsets from the second point (Pt2) to the de-
termined point and enter their values in the following
fields of the Enter Distance Offsets screen. You may de-
fine the direction of the given offset in two ways: either
click on the button of the current selection or use the mi-
nus sign "-" for the current value. For instance,

and

directions are the same.


The directions of the offsets are explained in the figure
here.

Note 1: The height of the prism for all measured points is un-
available in the Measurement tab and should be set in the Back-
sight screen.

Note 2: The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line "Pt1
- Pt2".

Note 3: 3D coordinates of the offset point are calculated relative


to line “Pt1 - Pt2” (calculated by extrapolation along the "Pt1 -
Pt2" line).

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-29


How To

The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.

Plane and Corner

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point,
as an intersection of a line of site and a plane defined by three
points. You create three auxiliary points, then perform distance
and angle measurements to these points and angle measurements
to the offset point.

Note that the user creates three auxiliary points in the same plane
where the inaccessible point is located. All four points must not
be on the same line. Find the plot here.

To do this determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Measurement tab of the Sideshot-Direct screen.

2. Open the Offset tab, and click in the


Offsets.
3. The Measurement tab displays. Take four measurements
in any order:
1) Click the Prism1 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the first prism of the plane.
2) Click the Prism2 button and measure the
distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the second prism of the plane.

A-30 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

3) Click the Prism3 button and measure the


distance, vertical and horizontal angle to
the third prism of the plane.
4) Click the Corner button and measure the
vertical and horizontal angle to the offset
point.
1. You can see the plot of measurements for the Plane and
Corner Offset here.

Note: The height of the prism for all measured points is unavail-
able in the Measurement tab and should be set in the Backsight
screen.

The Points screen will display the coordinates of the offset point.

Offsets for GPS Survey


The Offsets tab is always presented when you open the Topo
screen for the GPS survey. The Offsets tab contains up to three
offset types. The Offset Laser is available only if a laser distance
meter device is used.

Click the link to find out more:

Offset Line

Azimuth and Offsets

Offset Laser

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-31


How To

Offset Line

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point,
using two measured points and additional distance offsets mea-
surements, for example, performed with the tape.

To do this determination:

1. Enter the name of the determined point and the rover an-
tenna height in the Point field of the Topo tab.

Note: Be sure that the current type of position calculation


method corresponds to the precision of the determined
point.

2. Open the Offsets tab, and click in the


Offsets.

3. Select the Start and End points from the map (click )

or from the list (click ), or measure them (click

) in the Line screen.


4. Measure offsets from the End point to the determined
point and enter the values. Use one of two ways to define
the direction of the given offset: either click on the button
of the current selection or use the minus sign "-" for the
current value (see examples here). The directions of the
offsets are explained in the figure here.

5. Click to save the calculated coordinates of the offset


point. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the
offset point.

A-32 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

The offset point lies on the perpendicular to the line "Start Point
- End Point".

Hoffset_point = Hpoint2 + (Up/Down_offset)

Azimuth and Offsets

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point,
using one measured point and distance and angle measurements
from this point to the offset point.

To determine a point with the Azimuth & Offsets task:

1. Type the name of determined point and the rover antenna


height in the Point field of the Topo tab.

Note: Be sure that the current type of position calculation


method corresponds to the precision of the determined
point.

2. Open the Offsets tab, and click in


the Offsets.

3. Select Start Point from the map (click ) or from the

list (click ), or measure it (click ) in the Line


screen.
4. Define the direction to the offset point in the Azimuth -
Distance - Height screen. Use one of two methods to de-

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-33


How To

fine the offset point in horizontal plane (the hand symbol


points out that there is a choice):
1) The horizontal angle is determined by
the azimuth to the offset point. Find
the plot here.
2) The horizontal angle is determined by
the azimuth to a point (selected from
the list/map). The offset point lies on
the line "Start Point"- "Selected
Point". Find the plot here.
5. Measure the vertical offset from the Start Point, and enter
the value in the corresponding field of the Azimuth - Dis-
tance - Height screen. Use one of three methods to define
the offset point in a vertical plane (the hand symbol points
out that there is a choice):
1) The zenith angle is measured
(from an index with 0 directed
towards the zenith). Find the
plot here.
2) The vertical angle is measured
(relative to 0 that coincides
with horizontal). Find the plot
here.
3) The vertical distance between
the offset point and the hori-
zontal passed through the start
point. Find the plot here.
6. Measure the horizontal distance offset from the Start Point
and enter the value in the corresponding field of the Azi-
muth - Distance - Height screen.

A-34 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help


Offsets in MAGNET Field

7. Click to calculate and save the coordinates of the


offset point. The Points screen will display the coordinates
of the offset point.

Offset Laser

What task does this offset type perform?- Determination of the


horizontal and vertical (3D) coordinates of an inaccessible point,
using distance and angle measurements to the point from a laser
range finder. MAGNET Field enables you to use an external la-
ser range finder. Before any measurement, set the type of the
used range finder in job configuration.

To work with an external laser range finder:

1. Click the Configure icon .

2. Click the Survey icon .

3. Click in the Rover Receiver screen.


4. Check the External laser option, and select which device
to connect the laser rangefinder to: Controller or Receiver.
5. Click Parameters in the Peripherals dialog to set commu-
nication parameters between the controller and external
laser range finder.
6. Before starting measurements with the laser range finder,
make sure that the current coordinate system in the given
MAGNET Field job is datum, grid, or localization.
7. Make sure that the job contains the coordinates of the
point where the laser range finder will be located. This
point is called "Occ point" for this offset type.

MAGNET Field 1.0 Help A-35


How To

8. Enter the name of the determined point in the Point field


of the Topo tab.

9. Open the Offsets tab and click in the


Offsets.
10.Select the name of the external laser range finder from the

list in the Bluetooth Devices screen. Click


in the dialog.

11.Select the Occupation Point from the map (click )

or from the list (click ) in the Config Laser screen.

12.Either enter the azimuth to the offset point (if


is selected). Find the plot here.

13.Or select a point from the list/map (if is se-


lected). In this case the horizontal angle will be deter-
mined by the azimuth to the selected point. The offset
point will be on the line "Occupation Point"- "Selected
Point". Find the plot here.
14.Enter the laser range finder height in the corresponding
field.
15.Set the laser to the desired point, and press the Fire button
on the laser range finder to measure the slope distance and
vertical angle to the point. After measurements are suc-
cessfully performed, MAGNET Field displays the Store
Point screen with the calculated coordinates of the offset
point.

16.Click to save the offset point in the MAGNET Field


job. The Points screen will display the coordinates of the
offset point.

A-36 MAGNET Field 1.0 Help

You might also like